JP7364007B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is known that includes an operating means configured to be electrically operable and a connecting means for connecting a ground portion of a board (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-236463

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in the connection between the connecting means and the board .

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the connection between the connecting means and the board .

To achieve this object, there is provided a gaming machine according to claim 1, which includes operating means configured to be electrically operable, and a board having a ground portion connected to earth, and disposed at a distance from the operating means. and a connecting means for electrically connecting a conductive portion disposed on the operating means and configured to be electrically conductive to a ground portion of the substrate, the connecting means being configured to be electrically conductive and connected to the operating unit. a conductor whose one side and the other side can be connected to a conductive part of the operating means and a ground part of the substrate; a conductive part of the operating means arranged along a part connecting the one side and the other side of the conductor and the substrate; an elastic member arranged to be elastically deformable in a state where one side and the other side of the conductor are connected to a ground portion of the conductor, and when the operating means or the substrate is relatively displaced, the elastic member The ground portion of the substrate is configured to be deformable, and the ground portion of the substrate includes a protrusion configured to protrude, and the other side of the conductor includes a first region that is in contact with the protrusion, and a portion of the ground portion that is larger than the first region. a second region that is spaced apart from the board and is not contacted by the protrusion, the gaming machine surrounds at least a portion of a portion connecting one side and the other side of the conductor, and the game machine A regulating means capable of regulating movement beyond a range is provided, and the elastic member is not formed at least in a portion of the conductor corresponding to the first region.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the connection between the connecting means and the board can be improved .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case and the slide unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case and the slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member taken along line XXa-XXa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 17. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is placed in close proximity. FIG. 3 is a front view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is placed in a close position. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position. FIG. 3 is a front view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is placed at a separated position. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the cover member and the slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the cover member and the slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the cover member and the slide drive mechanism. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide rail and the slide member. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail and the slide member. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail and the slide member. (a) is a front view of the slide member, and (b) is a rear view of the slide member. (a) is a front view of the slide member, and (b) is a rear view of the slide member. (a) is a front view of the slide member, and (b) is a rear view of the slide member. (a) is a reference view, and (b) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the slide mechanism. (a) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is placed at a distant position, and (b) is a front view schematically showing the slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is placed in a close position. FIG. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view schematically illustrating a slide mechanism. This is a reference diagram. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view schematically illustrating a slide mechanism. FIG. 7 is a schematic front view schematically illustrating a slide mechanism in a third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view schematically illustrating a slide mechanism. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view schematically illustrating a slide mechanism. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member in a 4th embodiment. (a) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the slide mechanism with the liquid crystal surface facing the front side, and (b) is a schematic front view showing the slide mechanism with the decorative surface facing the front side. It is a front schematic diagram shown. (a) and (b) are front schematic diagrams of the slide mechanism showing a transition state when the base member is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position. (a) and (b) are front schematic diagrams of the slide mechanism showing a transition state when the base member is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position. (a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board along the LVI-LVI line in FIG. 55(b). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board taken along the LVII-LVII line in FIG. 56(b). FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged sectional view of a passage member in a sixth embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the passage member in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the passage member taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). It is a partially expanded sectional view of the passage member in 8th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen in the first control example as the ninth embodiment, and (b) is the actual display screen in the first control example. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing control of the display area in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the effect in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing display contents in a first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing display contents in a first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing display contents in a first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing display contents in a first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the reversing operation of the slide member in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the decorative surface of the slide member in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing display contents in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of display control in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpot, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the contents of the variation pattern table for a loss (normal), and (d) is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the variation pattern table for a loss (probable variation). (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the over winning table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning over winning table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning over winning table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning table, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the losing over winning table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ending table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning ending table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning ending table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the losing ending table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the sub-LCD drive scenario, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the slide drive scenario, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the sub-LCD drive scenario. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a scenario, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a reversal drive scenario. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a drive data storage area. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a through gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the over winning process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing ramp editing processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-liquid crystal drive processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing normal winning effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the over winning effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-symbol setting process performed by MPU in a display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a drawing correction process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second control example as the tenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal configuration of the first variable prize winning device in the second control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing display contents in a second control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a decorative surface of a slide member in a second control example. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart which shows distribution motor setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 2nd example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart showing jackpot related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart showing the gaming method notification process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a display device of a pachinko machine in a third control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example as 11th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a sub-liquid crystal drive scenario in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the mirror effect drive scenario in the third control example. It is a diagram. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is a flowchart which shows main processing 3 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the mirror effect setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a modification of the display device in the third control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing modified examples of display contents of the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing modified examples of display contents of the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing modified examples of display contents of the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing modified examples of display contents of the first control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example as a twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flow chart which shows ending processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 4th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing 4 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 4th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot related processing 4 executed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game time measurement process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th control example. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. 159(a) is a front view of the liquid crystal display device in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159(b) is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective front view of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 2 is an exploded view of a liquid crystal display device. 163(a) is a top view of the conductive member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXIIIb-CLXIIIb in FIG. 163(a). 164(a) is a front view of the substrate member, and FIG. 164(b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member taken along the line CLXIVb-CLXIVb in FIG. 164(a). FIG. 3 is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device taken along the line CLXVIa-CLXVIa in FIG. 165, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 166(b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device in the range LXVIIIc. Ru. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. (a) is a top view of the conductive member in the fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the conductive member as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXIXb in FIG. 169 (a), and FIG. 169 is a side view of the conductive member as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXIXc. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. (a) is a top view of the electrically conductive member in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the electrically conductive member as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIb in FIG. 171(a). (a) is a top view of the conductive member in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the conductive member as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIIb in FIG. 172(a). (a) is a top view of the conductive member in the seventeenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 173(a). (a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. (a) to (c) are schematic cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. (a) is a top view of the conductive member in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXXVIb-CLXXVIb in FIG. 176(a). (a) is a front view of the substrate member in the nineteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177(a). 178(a) is a top view of the conductive member, and FIG. 178(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXXVIIIb-CLXXVIIIb in FIG. 178(a). (a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a conductive member. 180(a) is a front view of the substrate member in the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 180(b) is a sectional view of the substrate member taken along the line CLXXXb-CLXXXb in FIG. 180(a). 181(a) is a top view of the conductive member, and FIG. 181(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along the line CLXXXIb-CLXXXIb in FIG. 181(a). (a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a conductive member.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball extraction lever 52 is always biased in the front direction, and by sliding it in the rear direction against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 54b is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general prize winnings. It is constructed by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a region where prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where shots are fired). (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second prize opening 640 is reached. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so it is possible to give the player more opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, you can also enter the second prize opening 640 during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the open time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a per win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and allows a portion of the balls that flow down the right side of the game board, among the balls fired at the game board, to pass through. It is composed of When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, to the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, so it is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning hole 640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

A second variable winning device 82a is arranged at the upper left of the first winning hole 64, and a second specific winning hole 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, when a specific jackpot (for example, a 15R variable jackpot), the second variable winning device opens (enters an enlarged state) to create a special game state in which the ball easily enters the second specific winning opening 82. I can do it.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning hole 64, for example. , or the left side of the variable display unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 14. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 200. Moreover, FIGS. 7 to 14 are front views of the operation unit 200. In addition, in FIGS. 5 to 14, illustration of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back surface of the back case 300 is omitted.

Here, FIGS. 7 to 10 illustrate a state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position, and FIGS. 11 to 14 illustrate a state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position. Ru.

In this case, in FIGS. 7 and 11, the liquid crystal display device 523 is placed in a close position with the display surface 523a facing the front, and in FIGS. 8 and 12, the liquid crystal display device 523 is positioned with the display surface 523a facing the front. A state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a separated position is shown in each figure. In addition, in FIGS. 9 and 13, the liquid crystal display device 523 is placed in a close position with the decorative surface 523b facing the front, while in FIGS. A state in which the liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged at separate positions is illustrated in each figure.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operating unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a slide unit SL is rotatably housed in the internal space of the back case 300.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. .

The slide unit SL includes a base member 400 rotatably supported by the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and a slide mechanism 500 disposed on the front side of the base member 400. The slide mechanism 500 includes a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 that are slidably displaceable toward or away from each other. Note that the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are controlled by the speed of their displacement (rotation around the rotation axis 523c and slide displacement due to expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and the timing of displacement (start of displacement or stop of displacement). ) are set (controlled) so that they are the same.

The base member 400 is formed to be rotatable between a first rotational position and a second rotational position that is out of phase by approximately 90 degrees from the first rotational position. Note that at the first rotational position, the direction of sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is the vertical direction (see FIGS. 7 to 10), and at the second rotational position, the direction of sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is the vertical direction (see FIGS. 7 to 10). is the left-right direction (horizontal direction) (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

The liquid crystal display device 523 is formed as a liquid crystal display that displays patterns, etc., is rotatably supported, and has a display surface 523a facing forward (see FIGS. 7, 8, 11, and 12). ) and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b, which is the back side of the display surface 523a, faces the front (see FIGS. 9, 10, 13, and 14).

When the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid in the direction toward each other and placed in the close position, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are placed in front of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol is displayed. While the display device 81 is hidden from view (see FIGS. 7, 9, 11, and 13), the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid in a direction away from each other and placed at the separated position, By retracting the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 vertically or horizontally from the front of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 is made visible (as shown in FIGS. 8, 10, 12, and 14).

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit SL will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 43. First, a configuration in which the base member 400 of the slide unit SL is rotatably supported with respect to the back case 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 300 and slide unit SL, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 300 and slide unit SL. Moreover, FIGS. 17 to 19 are front views of the back case 300 and the base member 400.

Note that FIG. 17 shows the base member 400 rotated to the first rotation position, FIG. 19 shows the base member 400 rotated to the second rotation position, and FIG. 18 shows the base member 400 rotated to the first rotation position. The transition state when being rotated from one rotational position to a second rotational position or vice versa is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 15 to 19, the back case 300 includes a rotational drive mechanism for applying rotational driving force to the base member 400, a first wheel member 321 for rotatably supporting the base member 400, and a first wheel member 321 for rotatably supporting the base member 400. A second wheel member 322 and covering members 331 to 334 for holding the respective wheel members 321 and 322 are provided.

The rotational drive mechanism includes a drive motor 311, a pinion gear 312 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 311, a leading gear (first transmission gear 313a) meshing with the pinion gear 312, and a trailing gear (first transmission gear 313a) meshing with the pinion gear 312. The third transmission gear 313c) includes a transmission gear train meshed with the gear portion 403 of the base member 400, and is disposed on the upper right side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 when viewed from the front. Note that a second transmission gear 313b is interposed between the first transmission gear 313a and the third transmission gear 313c.

The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are disc-shaped members that are rotatably supported by a shaft 303 erected from the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and the outer peripheral edge of the base member 400. A plurality of them are arranged at predetermined intervals along the line. In the front view shown in FIG. 17, the first wheel member 321 is located at two locations below the base member 400, and the second wheel member 322 is located at two locations above the base member 400 and at two locations on the left and right sides. Each is arranged. Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the detailed configuration of each wheel member 321, 322 will be described.

20(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member 321 taken along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 20(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member 322 taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. be.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), a brass shaft 303 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in a posture protruding toward the front side. A first recess 301b1 and a second recess 301b2, which are circular in front view and are concentric with the axis 303, are recessed in the bottom wall 301 around the recess 303.

The first recess 301b1 and the second recess 301b2 are recesses for receiving and accommodating the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 rotatably supported on the shaft 303, and the inner diameter of the second recess 301b2 is , smaller than the outer diameter of the first wheel member 321 and larger than the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322. Thereby, it is possible to suppress incorrect assembly of the first wheel member 321 into the second recess 301b2.

The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are formed as members having an H-shaped cross section with grooves 321a and 322a having a U-shaped cross section that are continuous in the circumferential direction. The outer edge (flange portion 402) of the member 400 is inserted. This allows the base member 400 to be rotatably supported on the rear base 300 while regulating the displacement of the base member 300 in the radial direction (downward direction in FIG. 20(a)) and the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 20(a)). can.

Note that the first wheel member 321 is formed as a ball bearing in which a plurality of spheres are arranged between an inner ring portion held by the shaft 303 and an outer ring in which the groove 321a is recessed. Thereby, the durability of the first wheel member 321 that supports the load of the base member 400 can be ensured, and the output required for the drive motor 311 can be suppressed.

Further, in the second wheel member 322, of the pair of walls facing each other with the groove 322a in between, the outer diameter of the wall located on the front side (left side in FIG. 20(b)) is larger than the inner diameter of the recess 301b2. be done. That is, in the second wheel member 322, the outer diameter of the front wall is larger than that of the back wall. Thereby, the rigidity of the second wheel member 322 can be ensured and the durability can be improved while suppressing the wrong assembly direction of the second wheel member 322 to the shaft 303.

In particular, in the present embodiment, a relatively heavy slide mechanism 500 is disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and the upper side of the base member 400 receives the weight of the slide mechanism 500 and is tilted forward. Since the second wheel member 322 is disposed above and on the left and right sides of the base member 400 (see FIG. 17), the outer diameter of the front wall of the second wheel member 322 is large as described above. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing the forward leaning posture of the base member 400 and improving the durability of the second wheel member 322.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 15 to 19. The covering members 331 to 334 are formed by dividing a rectangular plate-like body with a circular opening in the center into four parts vertically and horizontally, and are arranged in front of the bottom wall part 301 of the back case 300. . As a result, the covering members 331 to 334 are provided on the front sides of the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322, and each wheel member 321, 322 is prevented from coming off the shaft 303.

The base member 400 is a disc-shaped member with an opening 401 that is generally rectangular in front view formed in the center, and is formed in a flange shape along the outer edge. A flange portion 402 is inserted into the grooves 321a and 322a of the wheel member 322, and a flange portion 402 is carved on the front side and curved in an arc shape along the circumferential direction, and is connected to the tail gear (third transmission gear) in the transmission gear train of the rotational drive mechanism. and a gear portion 403 to which a gear 313c) is meshed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the forward direction from the state where the base member 400 is placed at the first rotational position shown in FIG. 17, and the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear train via the pinion gear 312, The rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is transmitted to the gear portion 403, and the base member 400 is rotated clockwise in front view (right rotation direction in FIG. 17). When the drive motor 311 is further rotated in the forward direction, the base member 400 passes through the state shown in FIG. 18 and is placed in the second rotational position shown in FIG. 19.

On the other hand, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position shown in FIG. , is transmitted to the gear portion 403, so that the base member 400 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (left rotation direction in FIG. 19), and is placed in the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17 through the state shown in FIG. Ru.

In this case, the weight of the base member 400 is supported by the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 mainly coming into contact with the groove bottom of the groove 321a of the first wheel member 321. That is, since it is supported by rolling contact between the circumferential surfaces of the outer circumferential surface of the flange portion 402 and the outer circumferential surface of the groove bottom of the groove 321a, the contact surface is minimized and supported with little friction. Thereby, the output of the drive motor 311 required to rotationally drive the base member 400 can be suppressed.

Further, since the slide mechanism 500 is disposed (fixed) on the front side of the base member 400, the base member 400 can be placed in the first rotational position and the second rotational position with respect to the rear case 300, as described above. 21 to 23, the slide mechanism 500 is rotated as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23. 21 to 23 are front views of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL, and FIG. 21 corresponds to FIG. 17, FIG. 22 corresponds to FIG. 18, and FIG. 23 corresponds to FIG. 19.

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide mechanism 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 43. 24 and 25 are a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL in a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged in a close position, and FIGS. 26 and 27 are a front perspective view and a front view in a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged in a separated position. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL in a state where the slide unit SL is in a state where 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit SL, and FIG. 29 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit SL.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, the slide unit SL includes a base member 400, a cover member 420 disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and a slide rail disposed on the front side of the cover member 420. 510, a slide member 520 disposed on the slide rail 510, and a slide drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the slide member 520 to cause it to slide.

The cover member 420 is a disc-shaped member having an opening 421 in the center that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front. The opening 421 of the cover member 420 is formed in substantially the same shape as the opening 401 of the base member 400, and the cover member 420 is placed on the front side of the base member 400 at a phase (rotational position) where the shapes of the openings 401 and 421 overlap. is placed (fixed).

Note that the space formed by the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 is also used as a space for rotating the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520. That is, when the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520 is placed in a close position, it is placed in a position overlapping the openings 401 and 421 when viewed from the front, and can be rotated without interfering with the cover member 420.

Here, the detailed configuration of this slide drive mechanism will be explained with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35 in addition to FIGS. 28 and 29. 30, 32, and 34 are front views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism, and FIGS. 31, 33, and 35 are rear views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism.

Note that in FIGS. 30 and 31, the transmission arm 437 is placed in the inward protruding position, which is a position for placing the slide member 520 in a close position, and in FIGS. 32 and 32, the transmission arm 437 is rotated from the inwardly protruding position to the outwardly inverted position or vice versa. The transition states when the data is changed are illustrated respectively. Further, in FIGS. 30 to 35, the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520 is schematically illustrated using a chain double-dashed line to show the positional relationship with the transmission arm 437 and to facilitate understanding.

The slide mechanism 500 of this embodiment is provided with a pair of slide members 520 and a pair of slide drive mechanisms for slidingly driving each of the slide members 520, and the pair of slide drive mechanisms are substantially Since they have the same configuration, both are given the same reference numerals, and only one will be explained, and the explanation of the other will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the slide drive mechanism includes a drive motor 431 disposed on the front side of the cover member 420, a pinion gear 432 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 431, and the pinion gear 432. A transmission gear 433 that meshes with the transmission gear 433, a rack member 434 that is formed into a curved plate shape with a rack gear 434a that meshes with the transmission gear 433 carved on the outer peripheral side, and an inner peripheral side of the rack member 434. A transmission gear 435 that meshes with a rack gear 434b carved in the shaft, a pair of arm drive gears 436 that are rotated in opposite directions by the transmission gear 435, and a base end side fixed to the pair of arm drive gears 436. It mainly includes a pair of transmission arms 437.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 431 rotates in the forward direction from the state where the transmission arm 437 is placed in the inward protruding position shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 (the position where its tip side faces the opening 421 side of the cover member 420) When the rotation is transmitted to the rack gear 434a of the rack member 434 via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are rotated, so that the pair of transmission gears 436 are rotated. The arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions about their base ends.

When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the forward direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 pass through the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and then move to the outward inverted position (approximately 180 degrees from the inward inverted position) shown in FIGS. 34 and 35. degree and is placed in a position with its distal end facing away from the opening 421 of the cover member 420).

On the other hand, the drive motor 431 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state where the transmission arm 437 is disposed in the outward reversal position shown in FIGS. When transmitted to the rack gear 434a, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are rotated, so that the pair of transmission gears 436 are rotated. The arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions about their base ends. When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the opposite direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 pass through the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 and are placed in the inwardly reversed position shown in FIGS. 30 and 31.

As will be described later, the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 is slidably connected to the sliding groove 524a in the connecting frame 524 of the slide member 520, and when the transmission arm 437 is rotated about the proximal end side, , the inner surface of the sliding groove 524a in the connecting frame 524 of the sliding member 520 is pushed and pulled by the distal end side of the transmission arm 437, and the sliding member 520 is slid (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

In this case, in a configuration in which the rotational driving force of the drive motor 431 is converted into the sliding displacement of the sliding member 520 using a linear rack member installed along the sliding direction of the sliding member 520, If the sliding displacement amount is secured, the linear rack member will not fit within the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 and will interfere with the back case 300 (outer wall portion 302), so the base member 400 will not fit into the back case 300. You will not be able to rotate it.

In order to enable rotation of the base member 400 with respect to the rear case 300, when a linear rack member is housed within the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420, the amount of sliding displacement of the slide member 520 becomes shorter. Not only that, but the linear rack member is exposed through the opening 421 and is visible to the player, spoiling the appearance.

On the other hand, a structure in which the arm drive gear 436 is directly driven by the pinion gear 432 of the drive motor 431 can be considered, but in this case, the arrangement position of the drive motor 431 overlaps with the locus of the slide displacement of the slide member 520, so the slide The amount of sliding displacement of member 520 becomes shorter.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a rack member 434 curved in an arc shape is disposed along the circumferential direction on the outer edge side of the cover member 420 (outside the opening 421), and the rotation of the drive motor 431 is controlled by the rack member 434. At the same time, the displacement is converted into the rotation of the arm drive gear 436 to rotate the transmission arm 437. Therefore, while securing the sliding displacement amount of the slide member 520, the base member 400 is moved relative to the rear case 300. In addition, exposure of the rack member 434 from the opening 421 can be avoided, and the appearance can be improved. Furthermore, since the drive motor 431 can be disposed outside (on both sides) of the slide displacement locus of the slide member 520, the amount of slide displacement of the slide member 520 can be ensured from this point as well.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIG. 24 to FIG. 29. The slide rail 510 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the cover member 420 and the slide member 520, and when the slide rail 510 is extended or contracted, the slide member 520 is moved relative to the cover member 420. The slide is displaced. In the present embodiment, the slide rails 510 are arranged in such a manner that the two sets each support the opposite ends of the slide member 520, and the two sets extend and contract in different directions (i.e., the phases are different by 180 degrees). They are placed opposite each other.

Here, the detailed configuration of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are exploded rear perspective views of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520. Note that the transmission arm 437 is illustrated in FIGS. 36 to 38 for ease of understanding.

In the present embodiment, two sets of slide rails 510 and slide members 520 are provided, and in these two sets, the opposing distance between the pair of slide rails 510 in one set is the same as that of the pair of slides in the other set. Since they are substantially the same in configuration except that the spacing between the rails 510 is smaller than the spacing between the opposing rails 510, both are given the same reference numerals, and only one will be described, and a description of the other will be omitted. Note that by providing a difference in the opposing spacing as described above, one set of slide rails 510 can be arranged between the opposing slide rails 510 of the other set.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the slide rail 510 is connected to a base end rail 511 disposed in front of the cover member 420 so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible on the front side of the base end rail 511. and a tip rail 513 connected to the front side of the intermediate rail 512 so as to be relatively movable in the longitudinal direction. That is, the base end rail 511 and the distal end rail 513 can be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction via the intermediate rail 512.

The slide member 520 includes a guided member 521 on one side and a guided member 522 on the other side, each of which has a tip rail 512 of a pair of slide rails 510 disposed on the back side, and a guided member 521 on one side and a guided member on the other side. A liquid crystal display device 523 rotatably supported between members 522, a connecting frame 524 connecting one guided member 521 and the other guided member 522, and a liquid crystal display device 523 disposed on the connecting frame 524. and a facing member 525 arranged to face each other.

The one side guided member 521 is divided into a rail side member 521a on which the tip rail 513 of the slide rail 510 is disposed, and a liquid crystal side member 521b that rotatably supports the liquid crystal display device 523. 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b are connected so as to be relatively displaceable.

Specifically, insertion holes 521a1 having a circular cross section are bored at two locations in the rail side member 521a, and a pair of cylindrical insertion pins 521b1 are inserted from the liquid crystal side member 521b to be inserted into the two insertion holes 521a1, respectively. It is installed protrudingly. The distance between the shafts of the insertion holes 521a1 is the same as the distance between the shafts of the insertion pins 521b1, and the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 521b1.

In this case, the axial directions of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 are perpendicular to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510 and parallel to the sliding plane of the slide rail 510. Therefore, a predetermined gap is formed between the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 over the entire circumference, and it is not possible to relatively displace the two in any direction (direction perpendicular to their axes) by the amount of the gap. can.

Note that a washer W having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the insertion pin 521b1 to prevent the insertion pin 521b1 from coming off from the insertion hole 521a1.

In this case, the thickness of the plate-shaped portion of the rail side member 521a in which the insertion hole 521a1 is formed is set to be smaller than the protruding dimension of the insertion pin 521b1. Thereby, the rail side member 521a can be displaced relative to the liquid crystal side member 521b also in the direction along the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal side member 521b and the liquid crystal display device 523 can form an inclined posture with respect to the rail side member 521a, with the other side guided member 522 serving as a fulcrum. For example, the liquid crystal side member 521b precedes the rail side member 521a in the direction of slide displacement, and the opposing interval becomes larger on the front side in the direction of slide displacement (decreases on the rear side in the direction of slide displacement). Relative displacement in form can be tolerated. Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to easily suppress sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 due to inertial force during rotational driving of the liquid crystal display device 523.

The liquid crystal display device 523 is a plate-shaped body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and as described above, is formed as a liquid crystal display, with one side serving as a display surface 523a capable of displaying a pattern, etc., and the opposite side to the one side serving as a display surface 523a. The other side is a decorated surface 523b.

In this case, the liquid crystal display device 523 has cylindrical rotation shafts 523c protruding from both longitudinal ends thereof, and each rotation shaft 523c has one side of the guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side of the guided member. 522 are rotatably supported in respective shaft support holes 521b2 and 522c. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotatably supported by the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522 via the rotating shaft 523c and the supporting holes 521b2, 522c, and by the rotation, the display surface 523a It is possible to form a posture in which the decorative surface 523b faces the front side (player side) and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b faces the front side.

Note that the axis of the rotation shaft 523c is arranged at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. In this case, in the liquid crystal display device 523, since the liquid crystal display is arranged, the display surface 523a side is made heavier than the decorative surface 523b side. Further, due to the asymmetrical shape of the components of the liquid crystal display and the decorative surface 523b, the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically located at least toward the display surface 523a from the axis of the rotation shaft 523c. Therefore, inertial force is likely to occur when the liquid crystal display device 523 starts or stops rotating.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven by a rotational drive mechanism provided on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521. The rotational drive mechanism includes a drive motor 531, a pinion gear 532 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 531, a first gear 533 meshed with the pinion gear 532, and a first gear 533 meshed with the first gear 533. A second gear 534 fixed to the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 531 is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 523 via each gear 532 to 534 to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523. .

Note that the rotation drive mechanism sets (controls) the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 so that their displacement (rotation) speed and displacement (rotation) timing (start of rotation or stop of rotation) are the same. be done.

Here, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of the liquid crystal display device 523 is set at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, regardless of whether the liquid crystal display device 523 is in a posture with either the display surface 523a or the decorative surface 523b facing forward, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 523 and the facing member 525 is constant.

A sliding groove 524a that extends linearly along a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510 is bored in the connecting frame 524, and the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 slides into the sliding groove 524a. Possibly inserted. Since the connection frame 524 is disposed on one side of the guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side of the guided member 522, the transmission arm 437 is rotated by the above-mentioned slide drive mechanism, and its tip side is in the sliding groove. When slid along 524a, the entire slide member 520 is slid.

Note that the connection frame 524 connects the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member 522, so that the entire liquid crystal side member 521b, the liquid crystal display device 523, and the other side member 522 are connected. The rigidity can be increased. This makes it easier to maintain a constant facing distance between the liquid crystal side member 521b and the other side member 522, making it easier to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 smoothly. Furthermore, as will be described later, sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 due to inertial force during rotational driving of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily suppressed.

The opposing member 525 is a plate-shaped member that stands upright from the front of the connection frame, and is spaced apart from the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523 (the surface that connects the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b) with a predetermined distance (the surface that connects the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b). They are placed opposite each other with a distance that allows rotation between them. Moreover, a plurality of LEDs (presentation means) are arranged on the facing member 525 and are formed to be able to irradiate light toward the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, an effect can be performed in which the player can see the light emitted from the LED and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523 from between the opposing member 525 and the liquid crystal display device 523.

A structure in which the slide member 520 configured as described above is slid and displaced by the slide drive mechanism (transmission arm 437) will be described. 39(a), FIG. 40(a) and FIG. 41(a) are front views of the slide member 520, and FIG. 39(b), FIG. 40(b) and FIG. 41(b) are front views of the slide member 520. FIG.

Note that FIG. 39 shows a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is placed in a close position, FIG. 41 shows a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is placed in a distant position, and FIG. Transition states when being slid to the separated position or vice versa are illustrated. 39 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, FIG. 40 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and FIG. 41 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 34 and 35.

Here, as described above, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 have the same displacement speed (slide displacement due to expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and displacement timing (start of displacement or stop of displacement). It is set (controlled) as follows. Therefore, only one liquid crystal display device 523 will be described, and the description of the other liquid crystal display device 523 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39, when the pair of transmission arms 437 are disposed in the inward protruding position (see FIGS. 30 and 31), the slide rail 510 is in a shortened state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is in the close position. will be placed in From this state, when the pair of transmission arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions about their base ends, the distal ends of the transmission arms 437 slide along the sliding grooves 524a of the connection frame 524, thereby causing the liquid crystal display to change. The device 523 is slid in a direction that extends the slide rail 510.

When the pair of transmission arms 437 are further rotated, and the pair of transmission arms 437 pass through the state shown in FIG. 40 and are placed in the outward inverted position as shown in FIG. 41 (see FIGS. 34 and 35). , the slide rail 510 is in an extended state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is placed at a separated position.

On the other hand, when the pair of transmission arms 437 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. , the liquid crystal display device 523 is slid in a direction that shortens the slide rail 510. The pair of transmission arms 437 are further rotated, and when the pair of transmission arms 437 pass through the state shown in FIG. 40 and are placed in the inward protruding position as shown in FIG. 39, the slide rail 510 is shortened. state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is placed in a close position.

FIG. 42(a) is a reference diagram, and FIG. 42(b) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 500.

In this embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 consists of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, which are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. In the structure shown as (hereinafter referred to as "reference structure"), one side guided member X is formed as an integral part (one part). The other configurations of the reference structure are the same as those of this embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the slide member 520 is formed to be slidable by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510, and the slide member 520 rotates between the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522. and a liquid crystal display device 523 which is pivotably supported. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated as well as slidably, increasing the variety of presentation operations. That is, not only the display surface 523a of the liquid crystal display device 523 but also the decorative surface 523b can be made visible to the player.

However, in this case, in the reference structure shown in FIG. 42(a), when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated relative to the guided member X on one side and the guided member 522 on the other side, the rotation starts or stops. The accompanying inertial force becomes parallel to the direction of the slide displacement, and the slide members (one side guided member , the slide will be displaced. That is, it becomes difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while keeping it stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of sliding displacement (the vertical direction in FIG. 42(a)).

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is formed from two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, and the two members 521a and 521b are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. The relative displacement tolerance of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side disposed on the side guided member 521 (the right side in FIG. 42(b)) and the side disposed on the other side guided member 522 (the right side in FIG. The allowable amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 shown in FIG. 42(b) left side) can be made different.

As a result, when an inertial force is applied due to the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, one side of the guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) of the liquid crystal display device 523 is moved from the other side of the displaced member. 522 side, and the liquid crystal display device 523 can have a displacement component in a direction (leftward direction in FIG. 42(b)) perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 42(b)). . Therefore, the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement can be used as a force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510 (that is, to restrict expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510), so that the slide member 520 can be prevented from being slid and displaced. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated while remaining stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of sliding displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 42(b)).

In this case, in this embodiment, the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (right side in FIG. 42(b)) disposed on the one side guided member 521 is The one side guided member 521 is in a form in which such relative displacement is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side where it is installed (the left side in FIG. 42(b)). A rotational drive means (a drive motor 531 and gears 532 to 534) is provided on the liquid crystal side member 521b (see FIG. 38). In other words, one side of the guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side of the guided member 522.

Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement is used as a force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510, the rotational drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and each gear 532 to 534) The pressing force can be increased by using the rotational inertia (weight) of As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated while remaining stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of sliding displacement.

In this embodiment, the drive motor 531 of the rotational drive mechanism is arranged with its drive shaft directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 and its main body directed away from the liquid crystal display device 523. , the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be located farther from the other guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a trajectory farther from the other displaced member 522.

This makes it easier to utilize the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the slide displacement direction is used as a force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510. The pressing force can be increased. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated while remaining stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of sliding displacement.

FIG. 43(a) is a front view schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 500 in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is placed at a distant position, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 500 in an arranged state.

Here, in the above-mentioned reference structure (see FIG. 42(a)), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid in a direction in which they approach each other and are placed in close positions, they come into contact with each other without a gap at the close positions. This increases the load on the slide drive mechanism (drive motor 431, gears 432, 433, etc., see FIG. 31) for slidingly displacing the liquid crystal display device 523, resulting in damage to them.

On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, a margin is provided at the position where the sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped, taking into account dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances, or control tolerances (the liquid crystal display devices 523 are not placed close to each other). If a sufficient gap is set between the two so that they do not come into contact with each other), the gap becomes large (the display of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side is visible to the player through the gap), and the appearance (direction effect) lead to deterioration.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the one side guided member 521 is formed from two parts, the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b, and the two members 521a and 521b are moved by relative displacement. The slide members 520 thus formed are arranged facing each other in alternating postures. That is, one side guided member 521 of one slide member 520 is connected to the other side guided member 522 of the other slide member 520, and the other side guided member 522 of one slide member 520 is connected to one side of the other slide member 520. They are arranged opposite to the guided member 521, respectively.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 43(b), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid in the direction in which they approach each other and come into contact with each other at the close positions, one slide member 520 and the other slide member 520 By relatively displacing the side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b retreats with respect to the rail side member 521a), the other side guided member 522 can be received in the sliding member 520 of the counterpart (the other and one side). (The one liquid crystal display device 523 and the other liquid crystal display device 523 can each be placed in a tilted posture with respect to the direction of sliding displacement.)

Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display devices 523 come into contact with each other at close positions, damage to the slide drive mechanism (drive motor 431, gears 432, 433, etc.) can be suppressed. Can be set to any position. As a result, in the close position, the liquid crystal display devices 523 can be brought close to each other with a smaller gap between them, and the appearance (presentation effect) can be improved accordingly.

Here, in this embodiment, a detected part is disposed on the other side guided member 522, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected part is disposed on the cover member 420, and the detected part is disposed on the cover member 420. is detected by the detection sensor, thereby detecting that the slide member 520 has been slid to a predetermined position. Therefore, even if the attitude of the liquid crystal display device 523 changes, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the detected member with respect to the cover member 420 (detection sensor). As a result, the position of sliding displacement of the sliding member 520 can be detected more accurately.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47. In the first embodiment, the slide mechanism 500 includes two sets of a slide rail 510 and a slide member 520 supported by the slide rail 510 (that is, the two sets have substantially the same configuration). Although the case has been described in which the two sets are arranged facing each other in a posture facing each other (that is, with a phase difference of 180 degrees), the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment has a slide member 520 and a slide member with different configurations. 2520, and these slide members 520, 2520 are arranged facing each other in a facing position. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

44 and 45 are front schematic views schematically illustrating a slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 46 is a reference diagram, and is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment. Note that FIG. 44 shows a state in which the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position, and FIG. 45 shows a state in which the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position. In addition, a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at a close position is shown in each figure.

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, on the front side of the cover member 420, two sets of slide rails 510 are arranged in different directions of expansion and contraction (i.e., with a phase of 180 degrees), as in the first embodiment. They are placed facing each other in different positions.

In this case, in the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, a slide member 520 is disposed on one set of slide rails 510 (upper side in FIGS. 44 and 45), as in the first embodiment. A slide member 2520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 of the other set (lower side in FIGS. 44 and 45).

In the slide member 2520, the positions of the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522 with respect to the liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed with respect to the slide member 520. Therefore, the one side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520, the one side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 2520, and the other side guided member 522 in one set of slide members 520, They are arranged to face the other guided member 522 in the other set of slide members 2520, respectively.

That is, in the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, one set of slide members 520 and the other set of slide members 2520 are arranged so that the slide displacement of both members 520, 2520 is reduced in plan view shown in FIGS. 44 and 45. It is located at the center in the direction of and is arranged in a line-symmetrical attitude with respect to an imaginary line perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement.

Here, as shown in FIG. 46, in the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment, as described above, two sets of substantially the same configuration face each other (that is, the phases are 180° different). Since they are arranged to face each other in the posture, one side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520 is opposite to the other side guided member 522 in the other set of slide members 2520, and the other side guided member 522 in one set of slide members 520. The guided members 522 are arranged to face the one guided member 521 of the other set of slide members 2520, respectively.

That is, in the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment, one set of slide members 520 and the other set of slide members 520 are located at the center in the direction of sliding displacement of both members 520 in a plan view shown in FIG. and is arranged in a point-symmetrical posture with respect to a virtual point (i.e., the center of rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300) located at the center in the direction orthogonal to the direction of sliding displacement. Ru.

Therefore, in the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment, when an inertial force is applied due to the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, the direction of slide displacement that occurs in one set of slide members 520 is perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement. The displacement component in the direction that occurs in the slide member 520 of the other set and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement that occurs in the other set of slide members 520 are in alternate directions (point-symmetrical directions, and the base member 400 and the cover member 420 46), the base member 400 and cover member 420 are rotated in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 46 with respect to the rear case 300. That is, it is difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the rear case 300.

On the other hand, according to the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the sliding displacement occurring in the member 520 and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the sliding displacement occurring in the other set of sliding members 2520 are arranged in the same direction (direction that is line symmetrical). ).

Therefore, rotational inertia is not generated in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 due to such a displacement component, so that rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the back case 300 can be suppressed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the back case 300.

FIG. 47 is a front view schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 2500, showing a state in which the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the adjacent position.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position (see FIG. 45), the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 520 of one set and the guided member 521 of the other set The one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 is disposed on the right side in front view.

In this case, the second rotational position of the base member 400 is a position rotated by 90° clockwise (clockwise) when viewed from the front from the first rotational position (see FIGS. 17 to 19 and 21 to 23). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, when the base member 400 is placed at the second rotational position (i.e., the direction of sliding displacement of the slide members 520, 2520 is horizontal (horizontal direction in FIG. 47)), , one side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520 and one side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 2520 are respectively disposed on the lower side in front view (lower side in the vertical direction). I can do it.

As a result, when the base member 400 is placed in the second rotational position shown in FIG. The displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction (displacement component in the direction of pressing the slide members 520, 2520 against the slide rail 510 (regulating the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510)) is vertically upward (in the direction opposite to the direction of gravity, Fig. 47 upward direction).

As a result, when sliding the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) in the horizontal direction, the displacement component in the above-mentioned direction cancels or reduces the effect of gravity, and the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the effect of gravity is reduced. As a result, the output of the drive motor 431 (see FIGS. 28 and 29) required for sliding displacement can be suppressed. Furthermore, wear of the slide rail 510 due to sliding displacement can be suppressed.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the second embodiment, when the base member 400 is placed at the second rotational position (the slide members 520 and 2520 are slid in the horizontal direction), the one side guided member 521 is moved to the other side guided member 522. Although the case has been described in which the guided member 521 on one side is arranged vertically lower than the guided member 522 on the other side in the third embodiment, the guided member 521 on one side is arranged above the guided member 522 on the other side in the vertical direction. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

48 and 49 are front schematic views schematically illustrating a slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment. Note that FIG. 48 shows a state in which the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position, and FIG. 49 shows a state in which the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position, In addition, a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at a close position is shown in each figure.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, a slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment is formed by rotating the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment by 180 degrees. That is, contrary to the case of the second embodiment, the slide member 2520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side in FIGS. 48 and 49), while the slide member 2520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side in FIGS. 48 and 49). A slide member 520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 (lower side).

That is, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position, the one side guided member 521 of one set of slide members 2520 and the one side guided member 521 of the other set of slide members 520 A guide member 521 is disposed on the left side in front view.

Similarly to the second embodiment, when the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment configured as described above is subjected to inertial force due to the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, one side The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement occurring in the slide members 2520 of the other set and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement occurring in the slide member 520 of the other set are arranged in the same direction (line (orientation that is symmetrical).

Therefore, rotational inertia is not generated in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 due to such a displacement component, so that rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the back case 300 can be suppressed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the back case 300.

FIG. 50 is a front view schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 3500, and shows a state in which the base member 400 is placed at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is placed at the proximate position.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position (see FIG. 49), the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 of one set and the guided member 521 of the other set The one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 520 is disposed on the left side in front view.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, when the base member 400 is placed at the second rotational position (that is, when the direction of sliding displacement of the slide members 520, 2520 is in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 50)), , the one-side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 2520 and the one-side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 520 can be respectively disposed on the upper side in front view (upper side in the vertical direction). .

As a result, when the base member 400 is placed at the first rotational position shown in FIG. 47 and an inertial force is applied due to the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, the slide displacement is The displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction (the displacement component that generates the force (braking force) that presses the slide member 520 against the slide rail 510) can be vertically downward (in the gravity direction, lower side in FIG. 50). Thereby, when rotating the liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to suppress the slide member 520 from floating up, and the rotation can be stabilized. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress damage to the movable part and the sliding part due to rattling caused by lifting.

In this case, the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 is provided with rotational driving means (drive motor 531 and gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). In other words, one side of the guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side of the guided member 522.

Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement is used as a force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510, the rotational drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and each gear 532 to 534) The pressing force can be increased by using the rotational inertia (weight) of As a result, when rotating the liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to easily prevent the slide member 520 from floating up, and the rotation thereof can be stabilized. Furthermore, damage to the movable parts and sliding parts due to rattling caused by lifting can be easily suppressed.

Furthermore, since the drive motor 531 of the rotational drive mechanism is disposed with its drive shaft directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 and its main body directed away from the liquid crystal display device 523, the drive motor 531 The center of gravity of the guide member 522 can be located further away from the other guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a trajectory farther from the other displaced member 522.

This makes it easier to utilize the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the slide displacement direction is used as a force (braking force) to press against the slide rail 510. The pressing force can be increased. As a result, when rotating the liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to easily prevent the slide member 520 from floating up, and the rotation thereof can be stabilized. Furthermore, damage to the movable parts and sliding parts due to rattling caused by lifting can be easily suppressed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation axis 523c of the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the center in the width direction, but in the fourth embodiment, the rotation axis 4523c is located at an eccentric position in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523. will be placed in Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail 510 and slide member 4520 in the fourth embodiment. Further, FIG. 52(a) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 4500 with the display surface 523a facing the front side, and FIG. 52(b) is a front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 4500 with the display surface 523a facing the front side. FIG. 4 is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 4500 in a state where the slide mechanism 4500 is Note that FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b) illustrate a state in which the base member 400 is placed at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 4523 is placed at the separated position.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the slide mechanism 4500 in the fourth embodiment has a cylindrical rotation shaft 4523c protruding from both longitudinal ends of a liquid crystal display device 4523, as in the first embodiment. The rotating shaft 4523c is rotatably supported by shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c of the guided member 4521 (liquid crystal side member 4521b) on one side and the guided member 4522 on the other side.

That is, the liquid crystal display device 4523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 4521 and the other-side guided member 4522 via the rotating shaft 4523c and the supporting holes 4521b2, 4522c, and by the rotation, the display surface 523a It is possible to form a posture in which the decorative surface 523b faces the front side (player side) and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b faces the front side.

In this case, the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c are formed at positions further apart from the opposing member 525 along the direction of slide displacement than in the case of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). set to the position. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotation axis 523c is arranged at the center in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, whereas in the fourth embodiment, the rotation axis 4523c is arranged in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (Fig. 52(a) ) and FIG. 52(b) vertical direction).

In addition, in the rotational drive mechanism in the fourth embodiment, since the formation position of the shaft support hole 4521b is spaced apart from the pinion gear 532 of the drive motor 531, the pinion gear 532 and the first gear 533 are separated from each other in the rotational drive mechanism in the first embodiment. A third gear 4535 is additionally arranged between.

Here, as described above, the facing member 525 has a plurality of LEDs disposed on the side surface facing the liquid crystal display device 4523, and the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b). The light emitted from the LED and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 is transmitted from between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (the gap) between the facing member 525 and the gaming screen. It is possible to perform a presentation that allows people to see it.

Therefore, if the facing distance (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 is narrow, it will not be possible to secure a space (gap) for passing the light reflected on the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523, and the light will not be effectively transmitted to the player. Cannot be made visible.

In this case, the opposing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (the distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)) is such that the third pattern display is Since the device 81 is to be visually recognized by the player, it is preferable to ensure maximum security. On the other hand, the spacing between the pair of opposing members 525 (the spacing in the vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)) must be set to a size that can be accommodated between the opposing outer walls 302 of the rear case 300 due to the constraints of the installation space. It cannot be expanded because it is subject to (not).

Therefore, if the opposing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is increased to ensure a space between which the third symbol display device 81 can be viewed, the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 (LED) Since the spacing (gap) is made small, it becomes difficult to secure a gap for irradiation, reflection, or passage of the LED light.However, in order to secure such a gap, the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is narrowed. Then, it becomes difficult to secure an interval for viewing the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the formation positions of the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c are eccentrically located to one side in the direction of sliding displacement, so that the rotational position of the liquid crystal display device 4523 , the distance (gap) between the facing member 525 and the liquid crystal display device 4523 can be increased or decreased.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52(a), by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the display surface 523a faces the front side, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be reduced. . Therefore, the distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the amount of protrusion of the liquid crystal display device 4523 in front of the third symbol display device 81) can be reduced accordingly, and as a result, the player can A visible area for viewing 81 can be secured.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52(b), by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the decorative surface 523b faces the front side, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be increased. . Therefore, it is possible to secure a space (gap) through which the light emitted from the LED of the facing member 525 and reflected on the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 passes. It is possible to effectively perform a performance that is visually recognized by the player.

Furthermore, in order to increase the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525, it is necessary to arrange the facing member 525 at a position away from the liquid crystal display device 4523 (that is, to increase the distance between the pair of facing members 525). Since there is no such thing, the slide mechanism 4500 can be made smaller. That is, the slide mechanism 4500 can be accommodated between the opposing outer wall portions 302 of the back case 300, while achieving both the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 and the presentation effect of the light emitted from the LED. I can do it.

Next, a method of suppressing the driving force required for rotation when rotating the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position or vice versa will be described.

53(a) and 53(b) are front schematic views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position.

When rotating the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, as shown in FIG. Place it in In this case, one (upper side, upper side in FIG. 53(a)) of the liquid crystal display device 4523 has a display surface 523a facing the front side, while the other (lower side, lower side in FIG. 53(a)) The liquid crystal display device 4523 is oriented with the decorative surface 523b facing the front side.

As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 can be placed at a position eccentrically above the center in the vertical direction, so that the center of gravity G can be positioned above the rotation center of the base member 400. can be done.

Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90° clockwise in front view (clockwise in FIG. 53(a)) from the first rotational position shown in FIG. 53(a) to the second rotational position shown in FIG. 53(b). When rotating to , the movement locus of the center of gravity G (indicated by a broken line arrow in FIG. 53(b)) can be set to be a locus of movement downward (in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the base member 400 starts rotating from the first rotation position, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be made to act as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400, The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for rotating the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position can be suppressed.

54(a) and 54(b) are front schematic views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position.

When rotating the base member 400 from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, as shown in FIG. Place it in In this case, one of the liquid crystal display devices 4523 (the side that moves in the direction of gravity as it rotates to the first rotational position, the left side in FIG. 54(a)) has a display surface 523a facing the front, while The other liquid crystal display device 4523 (the side that moves in the direction opposite to the gravity direction as it rotates to the first rotational position, the right side in FIG. 54(a)) is in a posture with the decorative surface 523b facing the front side.

As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (i.e., the position of the center of gravity G) is moved away from the rotation center of the base member 400, and is eccentrically moved toward the direction of gravity with subsequent rotation ( It can be placed on the left side of FIG. 54(a).

Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 54(a)) when viewed from the front, and from the second rotational position shown in FIG. 54(a) to the first rotational position shown in FIG. 54(b). When rotating to the position, the movement locus of the center of gravity G (indicated by a broken line arrow in FIG. 54(b)) can be set as a locus of movement downward (in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the base member 400 starts rotating from the second rotation position, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be made to act as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400, The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for rotating the base member 400 from the second rotation position to the first rotation position can be suppressed.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55(a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 55(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13. Further, FIG. 56 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the LVI-LVI line in FIG. 55(b), and FIG. 57 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the LVII-LVII line in FIG. 56(b). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the game board 13 is provided with a passage member 5600 made of a resin material and forming a passage through which game balls flow. The passage member 5600 includes a rolling plate 5610 extending in the width direction of the game board 13 (in the left-right direction in FIG. 55(b)), and a rolling plate 5610 on the front side of the rolling plate 5610 (on the front side in the paper plane in 55(b)). A front wall 5620 is provided, a back wall 5630 is provided on the back side of the rolling plate 5610 (on the back side of the paper in FIG. 55(b)), and a part of the back wall 5630 is placed on the back side. It mainly includes an overhanging wall portion 5640 formed in an overhanging manner.

The rolling plate 5610 is a member whose upper surface serves as a rolling surface for game balls, and includes a first portion that is inclined downward from the width direction end of the game board 13, and a first portion of the first portion. A W-shaped rolling surface in front view is formed from the end on the downwardly inclined side and the second portion which is upwardly inclined toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610 is recessed at the connection portion between the first part and the second part, and is downwardly directed toward the front side (the front side in FIG. 55(b)). A recessed portion 5611 that is inclined and a recessed portion 5612 that is recessed in the uppermost portion of the second portion and that is inclined downward toward the back side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 55(b)) are provided.

The front wall portion 5620 is erected above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610, and suppresses the game balls from falling from the upper surface of the rolling plate 5610. However, the front wall portion 5620 is cut out at a portion corresponding to the recess 5611 of the rolling plate 5610, so that the game ball received in the recess 5611 can be dropped.

The projecting wall portion 5640 is a member for forming a passage for the game balls rolling on the upper surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to flow out from the lower surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to the game area. The game ball rolled on the plate 5610 and received in the recess 5612 is received in the projecting wall 5640.

Here, an operation unit 200 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. Therefore, as in this embodiment, if the overhanging wall portion 5640 is overhanging from the back side of the game board 13, in order to avoid interference with the overhanging wall portion 5640, the operation unit 200 (slide unit SL )'s range of motion is restricted, and its performance effect is inhibited.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is formed to have a U-shaped cross section (see FIG. 57), and the width dimension between the inner wall surfaces (the left-right dimension in FIG. 57) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. is also set to a slightly larger dimension, while the depth dimension from the front of the back wall portion 5630 to the inner wall surface (vertical dimension in FIG. 57) is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In this case, the top of the overhanging wall portion 5640 having an arc-shaped cross section in the overhanging direction (right side in FIG. 56, upper side in FIG. 57) is chamfered (cut) by an imaginary plane parallel to the back wall portion 5630, and An opening 5641 is formed in the chamfered portion, and the width dimension (the horizontal dimension in FIG. 57) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

That is, since the game ball can pass through (flow down) the passage formed by the projecting wall part 5640 with a part of the game ball protruding outward from the opening 5641, the entire game ball can be passed through the passage formed by the projecting wall part 5640. Compared to the case where the overhanging wall portion 640 is formed in a size that surrounds the side, the overhanging dimension L1 of the overhanging wall portion 5640 toward the back side can be suppressed. Therefore, the installation space for the operation unit 200 and the movable range of the slide unit SL can be secured accordingly.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a partially enlarged sectional view of a passage member 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 57. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 58, the overhanging wall section 6640 in the sixth embodiment includes a pair of walls erected from the back wall 5630, and a wall section connecting the erected tips of the pair of walls. It is formed into a U-shaped cross section, and an opening 6641 is formed in the wall on the projecting tip side (upper side in FIG. 58) of the U-shaped cross section.

The opening 6641 is formed in such a manner that its width (the left-right dimension in FIG. 58) decreases from the inner wall side to the outer wall side of the overhanging wall portion 6640. That is, the inner peripheral surface of the overhanging wall portion 6640 is formed as an inclined surface. This increases the amount by which a part of the game ball can protrude outward from the opening 6641, making it possible to suppress the overhang dimension L2 of the overhang wall 5640, and at the same time making it possible to suppress the overhang dimension L2 of the overhang wall 5640. The rigidity of the projecting wall portion 6640 can be ensured by maximizing the thickness at the portion where the projecting wall is exposed.

In this case, in this embodiment, the width dimension W of the opening 6641 on the inner wall surface of the overhanging wall section 6640 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the inner wall surface of the overhanging wall section 5640 and the opening The angle of the inclined surface (the inner circumferential surface of the opening 6641) is set so that the ridgeline portion S with the inner circumferential surface of the portion 5641 comes into contact with the game ball. As a result, while ensuring a sufficient amount of protrusion for a part of the game ball to protrude to the outside from the opening 6641, it is possible to suppress the object from being received on the tip side of the inclined surface (inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641). That is, the game ball can be received by the relatively rigid ridgeline portion S), thereby suppressing damage to the projecting wall portion 6640 (periphery of the opening 6641).

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. 59(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of a passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 59(b) is a sectional view of the passage member 7600 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment includes a front wall 7651, a rear wall 7652 disposed opposite to the front wall 7651, and a front wall 7652 facing the front wall 7651. It includes side walls 7653 disposed on both sides of a wall 7651 and a back wall 7652, and a space with a substantially rectangular cross section surrounded by these walls 7651 to 7653 forms a passage through which the game ball flows down. .

Here, the passage member 7600 is constructed such that a part of the front wall 7651 and the rear wall 7652 (the front inner circumferential wall 7651a and the rear outer circumferential wall 7652a) protrudes toward the back wall. A curved passage is formed by the portion 7651a and the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. That is, the front inner peripheral wall 7651a forms the inner peripheral side of the curved path, and the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a forms the outer peripheral side of the curved path.

In this case, in this embodiment, an opening 7654 is formed in the front inner circumferential wall portion 7651a on the inner circumferential side of the curved passage. That is, the opening 7654 is formed in the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball (rightward in FIG. 59(a)) when passing through the curved path. Note that the opening 7654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, by causing a part of the game ball to protrude outside from the opening 7654, it is possible to not only suppress the overhang dimension L3 of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a, but also suppress damage and wear of the passage member 7600. It's easy to do.

That is, since the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball (to the right in FIG. 59(a)) when passing through the curved path, the ball is pressed by the centrifugal force. The game ball can be received by the rear outer circumferential wall 7652a which has no opening 7654 and has relatively high rigidity, and the game ball can be prevented from being pressed against the front inner circumferential wall 7651a by centrifugal force. . As a result, damage to the front inner circumferential wall portion 7651 whose rigidity is relatively low due to the formation of the opening portion 7654 and wear at the periphery of the opening portion 7654 can be suppressed.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. In FIG. 60, the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 60, the passage member 8600 in the eighth embodiment has a front wall portion 7651 (front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a), a rear wall portion 7652 (rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a), as in the seventh embodiment. and side wall portion 7653 to form a curved passageway having a substantially rectangular cross section. Note that in this embodiment, an opening 8654 is formed in the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a. The opening 8654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, by causing a portion of the game ball to protrude outside from the opening 8654, the overhang dimension L4 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be suppressed. In this case, in this embodiment, the movable range of the slide unit SL is set to a position that overlaps with the range Rg, which is the displacement locus of a portion of the game ball projected from the opening 8654. Thereby, the space (range Rg) formed by reducing the protruding dimension L3 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be effectively utilized, and the movable range of the slide unit SL can be expanded. As a result, the presentation effect of the slide unit SL can be enhanced.

In this case, in the passage member 8600, a first switch 8655 and a second switch 8656 for detecting passage of a game ball are arranged upstream and downstream of the opening 8654, respectively. Therefore, by monitoring the detection states of the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, it can be determined that at least no game ball exists in the passage of the passage member 8600, and therefore, a part of the game ball protrudes from the opening 8654. It is possible to understand that the state is not

Therefore, based on the detection results of the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, the slide unit SL is moved to the range Rg only while it is determined that at least a part of the game ball is not protruding from the opening 8654. By controlling the slide unit SL to be displaced to a position where it overlaps with the slide unit SL, interference between the slide unit SL and the game ball can be avoided.

<First control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 126, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a ninth embodiment. In this first control example, when the game ball over-wins into the specific winning opening 65a, an over-winning effect is displayed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that he or she has won an excessive amount of money during a jackpot game, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, as an over-winning effect, information indicating the number of game balls that have over-winning may be displayed. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily grasp the number of game balls that have won over. Furthermore, the performance may be varied depending on the number of game balls that have won over. This makes it possible for the player to pay attention to the number of game balls that have won an excessive amount of winnings, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the first control example, as the over winning effect, the over winning effect indicating that the expectation level is high is likely to be displayed as the round in the jackpot game progresses. That is, the selection ratio of the over-winning effect is configured to be different depending on the number of rounds in the jackpot game. Thereby, even if the jackpot game lasts for a long time, the player's interest can be improved.

In the first control example, character strings indicating right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting, right-handed hitting, right-handed hitting) are arranged and displayed in a circumferential manner. Thereby, even if the display screen (sub-liquid crystal display device 523 or third symbol display device 81) rotates, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the player is in a right-handed game state.

Note that in addition to displaying a display suggesting that the player is playing right-handed, a voice suggesting that player is hitting right-handed (for example, a voice saying "Please play right-handed") may be output. Thereby, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is a right-handed game.

In the first control example, a sub LED 290 is provided on a decorative surface 523b which is the back side of a display surface 523a of a sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LED is made to blink in synchronization with the blinking display of a sub pattern displayed on the display surface 523a. It was configured as follows.

As a result, even if the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 performs a reversal operation and the display surface 523a of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 becomes invisible, the blinking display state of the sub-symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub-LED. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In the first control example, symbols are displayed across the upper display surface 523a and lower display surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. The display position of the symbol is configured to be changed in accordance with the displacement. Thereby, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used to perform the performance, and the player's interest can be improved. Moreover, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 becomes invisible by the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, effects can be suitably displayed.

In the first control example, the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (slide) up and down (that is, when the display area is vertically long), and when they are driven (slide) left and right. ) (that is, when the display area is horizontally long), the display angle and display coordinates of the image data are corrected. Thereby, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used to perform the performance, and the player's interest can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 62(a), data of images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be explained.

In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 are configured to perform display based on one image data. Specifically, image data expressed in coordinates from (0, 0) to (X, Y3) is used, and image data in the area from (0, 0) to (X, Y1) is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 523. The image data of the area from (0, Y1) to (X, Y2) is displayed on the upper display surface 523a, and the image data of the area from (0, Y2) to (X, Y3) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Data is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

FIG. 62(b) is a schematic diagram showing the content of the effect at the time when the push effect is started. In the push effect, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to a close position, and a button with the word "PUSH" drawn on the lower display surface 523a2 is pressed. Is displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 while this button is displayed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid up and down, and the display position of the symbol is changed according to the slide movement. The performance is started (see FIGS. 63 to 65).

Next, the effect display in this control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In this control example, an effect display using the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) provided on the slide member 520 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Specifically, with respect to the third symbol display device 81, the upper display surface 523a1 of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is directed upward (upward from the perspective of FIG. 63), and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is directed downward. By sliding downward (downward from the viewpoint in Figure 63), the display area used for displaying the effect is expanded, and the expanded display area is used to enlarge the pattern (in Figure 63, the pattern imitating a "fish"). An effect display such as increasing the number of symbols or increasing the number of symbols is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to display a wide variety of patterns in the display area, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game for the player.

FIG. 63(a) is a diagram showing the display area in a state where the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 completely covers the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 63(a), in this state, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 have been slid to a position where they are in contact with each other, and the upper display surface 523a1 covers the upper half of the symbol, and the lower display surface 523a1 covers the lower half of the symbol. The display is controlled to be displayed on the display surface 523a2.

Even in such a case, the display data displayed on each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, there is no need to provide separate display data for the sub-liquid crystal display device, and the amount of data can be reduced.

Note that in this control example, a configuration is used in which the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered by the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, but other configurations may be used. The display area in which information regarding the game to be played (for example, display of the number of pending memories or display of an abnormality) is configured to be visible no matter where the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 moves. good.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 starts sliding from the state shown in FIG. 63(a), it shifts to the state shown in FIG. 63(b). This FIG. 63(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started from the state shown in FIG. 63(a). As shown in FIG. 63(b), when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 starts sliding, the upper display surface 523a1 slides upward (upward from the perspective of FIG. 63(b)) and then downwards. The display surface 523a2 slides downward (downward from the perspective of FIG. 63(b)). The same display object (upper half and lower half of the pattern) as in FIG. 63(a) is displayed on the slid upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2. This is made possible by moving the display position of the display object in accordance with the amount of movement of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2).

Then, by sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is exposed between the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. This third symbol display device 81 displays symbols corresponding to the upper half of the display object displayed on the lower display surface 523a2, the lower half of the display object displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and a third symbol display. The symbols to be displayed on the display surface of the device 81 are displayed, and from the front side (visible side), the lower display surface 523a2 (lower symbol), the upper display surface 523a1 (upper symbol), and the third symbol display device 81. are displayed in the order of the display screen (middle design).

In the state shown in Figure 63(b), most of the three symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, and lower symbol) are displayed overlapping each other, so it is clear to the player which symbol is displayed. This is a difficult situation for people to understand. In this state, each symbol is stacked so that the symbol (middle symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the most difficult to see, so it is difficult to see what kind of symbol will appear last to the player. This has the effect of allowing the player to perform the performance while making them look forward to it, and preventing them from getting tired of the game early.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), a state in which the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has further progressed from the state shown in FIG. 63(b) will be described. 64(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sliding movement of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 63(b), and FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has further progressed in sliding movement. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), as the sliding movement of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 progresses, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are separated, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 By gradually exposing the surface, the entire display area is gradually expanded. Even in this state, the same display objects (upper half and lower half of the symbol) as in FIG. 63(a) are displayed on the slid upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2.

Then, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, each symbol is displayed so that the overlapping of the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol gradually decreases. With this configuration, for the display on the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, display data corresponding to a specific display object (display object displayed from the state of FIG. 63(a)) is displayed. It is only necessary to perform control to move the position in accordance with the sliding movement of each display surface, and there is an effect that the load on display control can be reduced.

In addition, by actually moving the display surfaces (the upper display 523a1, the lower display surface 523a2, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) to perform an effect display that gradually reduces the overlap of symbols, the overlapping symbols can be simply fixed. This has the effect that it is possible to suppress the sense of discomfort given to the player compared to the case where the game is played on a display screen that is different from the original screen.

In this case, the timing at which each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) slides may be varied, or the speed at which each display surface slides may be changed, and the slide movement of each display surface may be changed in response to the slide movement. It is a good idea to perform display control. This has the effect of further enhancing the production effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b), a state in which the sliding movement of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 has further progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64(b) will be described. FIG. 65(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sliding movement of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has further progressed in sliding movement. FIG.

By sliding the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 to the position shown in FIG. 65(a), a part of the mode showing the number attached to the middle symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. start. Furthermore, when the sliding movement of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 progresses and the state shown in FIG. ). In this state, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the current display performance by visually recognizing the form indicating the numbers attached to the middle symbol.

In addition, in this control example, when a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol, the effects shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 are executed. , may be used for other purposes. For example, after displaying the fact that a special symbol has won a jackpot with the third symbol, it is used in a technique that uses a presentation display to notify whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot or a fixed variable jackpot (so-called fixed variable promotion effect). It's okay.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the display contents when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates will be described. FIG. 66(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the aspect when abutting in the direction.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 66(a) to the state shown in FIG. 66(b), the display position of the display data of the display object displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is By correcting the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to display the same display mode as before the rotation. In this case as well, the display data displayed on each display screen uses the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so there is no need to separately provide display data and the amount of data can be reduced. There is an effect that it can be done.

Next, referring to FIG. 67, the reversing operation of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 will be described. In this control example, the slide member 520 is configured to be reversible as described above, and the above-mentioned display surface (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) is provided on one surface thereof, and the display surface (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) is provided on the other surface. is provided with decorative surfaces (upper decorative surface 523b1, lower decorative surface 523b2).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, a presentation mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed in a position covering the front side of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. 67(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the display surface of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed from the state facing the front side, and FIG. 67(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the display surface of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is facing the front side. It is a diagram showing a state in which the decorative surface has begun to face the front side (a state in which the decorative surface has begun to face the front side). The sub-liquid crystal display device 523 hides most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side, and the main effect is switched to the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in place of the third symbol display device 81. is displayed. At the bottom of the lower display surface 523a2, a decorative pattern Z indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and on the decorative surface 523b2 on the back side of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative pattern Z on the front side and A sub-LED 290 is arranged at the matching position. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted, with the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 facing the front side. By reversing, the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are combined (connected in parallel (arranged in contact)) to form an apple pattern and the word "CHANCE". It is configured. The underside of the apple is decorated with wave-shaped decorations, and four LEDs are arranged at each tip. Among them, the lowest LED arranged on the lower decorative surface 523b2 is composed of a sub-LED 290. 68(a) shows a state in which the sub-LED 290 is turned off, and FIG. 68(b) shows a state in which the sub-LED 290 is turned on.

With this configuration, even if the sub-liquid crystal display device 520 is reversed and the display screen becomes invisible, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing, thereby preventing the player from becoming confused. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a right-handed hitting notification mode, which is a mode of suggesting the launch position of a game ball during a jackpot game, will be described. FIG. 69(a) shows a right hit notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the upper display surface 523a1 during the jackpot game. Three characters "Right hit" are displayed curved in a circular shape (ring shape), and during the jackpot game, these characters are each rotated clockwise and displayed. In addition, in this control example, the variable prize winning device 65 controls the game ball flowing down the right side (right side channel) of the third symbol display device 81 and the game ball flowing down the left side (left channel) of the third symbol display device 81. The game ball is placed in a position where it is easier to win than the ball (lower right side of the game area). As a result, the player normally operates the handle to play the game so that the game ball passes through the left channel and enters the first starting port 64, so that the firing strength is left-handed. The ball is fired, but during a jackpot game, the game is performed by operating the handle so that the firing intensity is such that the game ball passes through the right channel.

Here, by displaying the right-handed notification mode, it is notified that the handle is operated with a firing intensity that causes the game ball to pass through the right-hand channel, and by rotating the word "right-handed hitting" to the right, the right-hand channel is displayed. The position (direction) of the handle and the direction of rotation of the handle are notified at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 69(b), when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides and moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 during a jackpot game and hides the third symbol display device 81, In this case, a right-handed hitting notification mode is displayed at the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1. Further, FIG. 69(c) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated to the right. In this case, it is displayed at the lower right of the upper display surface 523a1 (the actual display position is unchanged from FIG. 69(b)). In this case as well, it is possible to correctly notify the right-handed operation without changing the character display direction for right-handed characters or the rotating display direction of the characters.

In this way, in this control example, by rotating and displaying the right-handed character display in a ring shape, it is possible to notify the correct position without changing the display mode even if the displayed display surface is rotated. I can do it. Therefore, the load on display control processing can be reduced. Furthermore, the amount of data can be reduced compared to preparing a variety of right-handed hitting notification modes.

In addition, in this control example, the right-handed display mode is displayed with characters, but a ring-shaped arrow pattern or a pattern imitating a game ball may be rotated. Furthermore, a pattern resembling a handle that changes the firing strength of game balls may be rotated and displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, a modification of the right-handed hitting notification mode in this control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a modification of the right-handed hitting notification mode. This modification is modified in that three ring-shaped arrow patterns curved to the right are added to the back side of the character display for right-handed characters.

FIG. 147(a) is a diagram showing a display area in a right-handed hitting notification mode. The right-handed hitting notification mode is displayed in a ring-shaped display area. This display area is divided into three areas at intervals of 120 degrees from the center, and includes a first area α, a second area β, and a third area γ. The first area α is an area where an arrow pattern curved to the right is displayed by rotating clockwise. It is displayed curved. The second area β and the third area γ are set in a layer above the rotating arrow pattern, and the rotating arrow pattern is not displayed in the second area β and third area γ. is configured so that it does not occur. Three arrow patterns are set, and when one arrow pattern moves to the back of the second area β, the next arrow pattern moves to the first area α and is displayed. There is. Note that the position of the layer in each area is configured to be changeable, and is set variably depending on the rotation angle of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523.

FIG. 147(a) shows a display mode when the right-handed notification mode is displayed at the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1, and the layer of right-handed character display in the layer of the first area α is below the arrow pattern. It is set. Therefore, the arrow pattern is displayed in the first area α, and the right-handed characters are not displayed. FIG. 147(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees to the right. In this case, the layer of text display in the third area β is set below the layer of the arrow pattern, and the layer of the text display of the first area α is set above the layer of the arrow pattern.

With this configuration, an arrow pattern pointing to the right is always displayed on the upper side of the gaming machine 10, and the correct position of the right channel can be notified to the player. In addition, in this modified example, the position where the arrow is displayed is changed by changing the layer settings, but the position is not limited to this.The rotation coordinate of the right-handed hitting notification mode can be changed (the right-handed hitting notification mode can be set as a sub). It may be configured to be variable by rotating in accordance with the amount of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, details for setting the effects described in FIGS. 63 to 65 will be described. In this control example, when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is slid, the display position of the symbol is corrected in accordance with the sliding amount.

Specifically, in response to the upper display surface 523a1 being varied upward from FIG. 70(a) to FIG. 70(b), the pattern 2 is The display coordinates of (upper pattern) are corrected upward.

Further, in response to the lower display surface 523a2 being varied downward, the display coordinates of the symbol 3 (lower symbol) are corrected downward based on the amount by which the lower display surface 523a2 has been slid.

In this way, by varying the display coordinates of each symbol according to the amount by which the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 has been slid, the symbols can be displayed in an integrated manner that spreads in accordance with the sliding movement of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523. You can display the performance.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 performs special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first winning type counter C2 used for the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 28), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 44). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, there is a first special symbol execution area 203a corresponding to a winning to the first winning opening 64 which consists of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4) and a second winning opening 640. A second special symbol execution area 203b corresponding to the winning is provided, and each of these areas is provided with a first winning in accordance with the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64a or the second winning hole 64b. The respective values of a random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a general pattern execution area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal starting gate (through gate) 67.

Next, each counter will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 71. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 299). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 299. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated in the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. If it matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first random number table is used for times when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a jackpot than when the probability is low (the period when the special symbol is in a low probability state). It is divided into two types: one for a high probability state (period), and the number of random numbers that become a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first winning random number table 202a for special symbols with high probability and the first winning random number table 202a for special symbols with low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any one of "0 to 9". It is determined whether there is one, and if it is one of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined that it is a jackpot.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). The counter is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. The ball is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a jackpot of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a miss of the special symbol, then The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, it corresponds to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode will be the one when the special symbol hits the jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is low, there is one random value that becomes a jackpot for the special symbol, and the random value "0" is used for the low probability. is stored in the first random number table. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 1 out of a total of 400 random numbers, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 10 random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 10 out of a total of 400 random numbers, so the probability that a special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/40".

In addition, if the random value that results in a jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability times and the random value that results in a jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability times, there is a duplicate value. To avoid this, you may set a random value for each jackpot. If there is a value that is always used as a random number value for a jackpot regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number value will be inputted from the outside and that a jackpot will be won illegally. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of special symbols or a low probability state of special symbols), by changing the random number value that becomes a jackpot, it is possible to win a jackpot with a special symbol. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value, fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in this first winning type counter C2, when the random number value is any one of "0 to 29", the jackpot type becomes "jackpot A". Further, when the random number value is any one of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In this control example, there are two types of jackpots, but the jackpot is not limited thereto, and may be one type or may be configured to have two or more types. Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first winning type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, by setting a jackpot type in which more rounds are executed when a jackpot is achieved with the second special symbol, it is possible for the player to win more easily with the second special symbol. It can make you look forward to it. Therefore, it is possible to make winning in the high-probability gaming state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly want to shift to the high probability state, and it is possible to make the player play the game for a longer period of time.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of a miss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol. ” (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and “completely off” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is stored in area 203a. At the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 64, it is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Note that the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for special symbols with high probability and one for special symbols with low probability, and the range of random values set for each stop type of miss depending on the table. is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so in order to prevent more reach effects than necessary from being selected, the table for high probability states has a wide random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed". is selected, and "completely off" is more likely to be selected. In addition, in a low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64, the random value range corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" is narrow from 0 to 79 for low probability situations. table is selected, making it difficult for "completely off" to be selected.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed pattern fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 93) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Incidentally, the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 72(a)) that stores a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is located inside.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "missing (long time)", "missing (short time)", various types of "missing normal reach", and various "missing super reach" are defined as variation patterns for missing. , various types of ``normal reach'' and various types of ``super reach'' are defined as fluctuation patterns of jackpot A. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). Although not shown in the figure, a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the audio lamp control device 113, and a more detailed fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is set in the audio lamp control device 113. The pattern contents are selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a.

The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67. It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The random number value for winning the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set by the normal symbol winning random number table (not shown). If it matches the random number value set in the hit random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for times when the probability of a normal symbol is low (period when the normal symbol is in its normal state) and when the probability is high that the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than when the probability is low (period when the regular symbol is in the normal state). It is divided into two types: one for short-time periods and one for short-time periods, and the number of random numbers that become jackpots included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

As shown in FIG. 73(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers for winning the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for low probability times. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that a normal symbol will be a hit is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random winning counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device displays a variable display of the normal symbols. is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The "○" symbol is displayed as being illuminated, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x once". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol wins, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 will be activated once for 0.2 seconds. '', but you can set the opening time and number of times as you like. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers for winning the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for high probability times. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that a normal symbol will be a hit is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device displays a variable display of the normal symbols. is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The "○" symbol is displayed as being illuminated, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened "twice for one second". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds compared to when the probability is low for the normal symbol, and furthermore, the time associated with the second winning hole 640 is Since the release period of the electric accessory 640a is very long, ``0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times'', it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit based on the value (random number) of the second random number counter C4. In addition, in this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol wins, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 will be activated only for "1 second x 2 times". It is opened, but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 93).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device (not shown).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74.

FIG. 72(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 72(a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

Here, the contents of the first winning random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 73(a). FIG. 73(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a. As described above, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 73(a)) is a table in which the random number values that result in a jackpot for a special symbol are defined. When the random number specified in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

The first winning random number table 202a includes a jackpot determination value (jackpot determination value at low probability) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low, and a jackpot determination value when the probability of the special symbol is high. A jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment value at high probability) is provided for determining whether or not it is a jackpot, and the number of jackpot judgment values (random numbers) for each jackpot is different. In this way, by varying the number of determination values (random numbers) for a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

Next, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 73(b). FIG. 73(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b. The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 73(b)) is set so that jackpot A and jackpot B can be selected respectively. Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set as "0-49" as the judgment value for jackpot A, and "50-99" as the judgment value for jackpot B.

Here, as mentioned above, "Jackpot A" is configured such that the winning game ball in the variable winning device 65 can pass through the variable probability switch 65a5 (i.e., a lottery to determine whether or not it will be in a variable probability state). However, in "Jackpot B", it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the variable probability switch 65a5 (that is, the lottery to determine whether or not the probability variable state will be entered is not executed).

Next, the contents of the second winning random number table 202c will be explained with reference to FIG. 73(c). FIG. 73(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 73(c)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 73(c), when the probability of normal symbols is low (during the normal state of normal symbols), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In this case, it is determined that the symbol is a hit. As mentioned above, if it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the "○" symbol will light up as a stop symbol (second symbol) after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device (not shown) ends. At the same time, the electric accessory attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x once".

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 74. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74(a)) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1.

This variation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74(a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 74(b)), a loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 74(c)), At least a deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 74(d)) is defined. In addition, although not shown in the drawings, there are other variable pattern tables and the like in the time-saving gaming state.

With reference to FIG. 74(b), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 74(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as the jackpot fluctuation patterns. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50" is "51 to 179" for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and for the variation patterns of special reach (90 seconds). ), "180 to 198" are respectively set as determination values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When selecting a variation pattern when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern in which a judgment value corresponding to the acquired variation type counter CS1 value is set as a jackpot. from the variable pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 74(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, as mentioned above, the stop type is determined from the stop type selection table (not shown) as whether it is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete miss is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", miss reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete error, a short error with a relatively short variation time (7 seconds) and a long error with a long variation time (10 seconds) are set. The determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to ``0-98'' for a short error (7 seconds), and ``99-198'' for a long error (10 seconds).

In addition, for missed reaches, "0 to 149" for various types of missed normal reaches (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for various types of missed super reaches (60 seconds), and "150 to 197" for missed special reaches (60 seconds) "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is a loss in the normal gaming state, and obtains it from the loss (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. Based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2.

FIG. 74(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variable) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This loss (probability variable) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that becomes a loss when the gaming state is a probability variable gaming state. This deviation (probable) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs from the above-described deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

As mentioned above, when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), a complete failure is determined. , if it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out reach is determined.

In this way, when the game is in the variable probability game state than in the normal game state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is a miss is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that when the probability changes, the fluctuation time of a loss becomes long, and the period until a jackpot is reached becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is delayed during the variable probability game state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 72, the explanation will be continued. FIG. 72(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 within the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 72(b), the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b. 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining balls It has at least a timer 203p, a probability variation valid flag 203q, a probability variation validity timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a time saving counter 203t, a sign flag 203u, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first prize opening 64. The respective values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on winning a prize are respectively stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special symbol 2 reserved first area to fourth area) like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores the values of a first win random number counter C1, a first win type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3. This is a storage area for the second winning hole 640 (second special symbol), and the first winning hole 64 (first special symbol) is the storage area for the second winning hole 640 (second special symbol). The only difference is that it is changed to a second special symbol), so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is distributed to four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas of the area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, winnings stored in other holding areas Shift processing is performed to shift the data to a reservation area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays a variable display (third This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first prize opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the number of reserved balls counter 203d increases by 1 until the maximum value of 4. are added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 85).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e performs a variable display (third This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it increases by 1 until the maximum value of 4. are added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 85).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times of reservation of variable display in the first special symbol N1) or the value of special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times of reservation of variable display in the first special symbol N2) is , the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the held pitch count command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 85 and S405 and S411 in FIG. 87). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e is changed. be.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the main control device by a pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of balls held in the variable display held in 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number of held pitches deviates from the actual fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received command for the number of held pitches.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol (reserved symbol) on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f calculates the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball through the normal starting port 67. ) is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (see S605 in FIG. 89).

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S705 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 90). :No).

The probability variable flag 203g is a flag indicating whether the current gaming state is a probability variable gaming state (probability variable gaming state). When the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (including a time-saving gaming state). In this control example, when the probability change setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (see S1303 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started. Note that in the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the configuration is such that the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the variable probability gaming state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the variable probability gaming state is determined depending on whether a game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65a5 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1512 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF based on the probability change flag 203g being set to ON. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off. Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

In addition, if the variable variable setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the variable variable switch 65a5 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that the variable variable switch 65a5 has passed, the variable variable setting flag 203h is set to ON. 203h may be formally set to ON and then restored. In this case, it can be determined whether the variable probability switch 65a5 has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether a variable probability passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the gaming parlor side by determining fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to on while the power is turned off and then turning the power back on. can.

The probability variable passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variable switch 65a5 in one round during the jackpot game (in this control example, 13 rounds in jackpot A). In addition, it can be determined whether all the game balls that entered the first variable winning hole 65 have been ejected based on the sum of the variable passing counter 203i and the ejected number counter 203s, which will be described later. This variable probability passage counter 203i is updated by incrementing by 1 when the variable probability switch 65a5 is passed (see S1511 in FIG. 98). Further, after executing the process to check whether the number of winning game balls and the number of ejected balls match the variable winning device 65, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1611 in FIG. 99). Note that this probability variable passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won into the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball is detected to have passed through the detection switch 65a1 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65, it is updated by adding one by one (see S1503 in FIG. 98). ). On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the number of winnings counter 203j) and the number of winnings (the total value of the number of winnings counter 203s and the variable passing counter 203i) are the same. After determining whether the value is correct, it is reset to the initial value "0". Note that the value of this prize winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting the time during which the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excited). In this pachinko machine 10, in jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and in jackpot B, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the 13th round for jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for jackpot B (see S1202 in FIG. 95). . On the other hand, in the process of S1509 of the winning process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. Note that this operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in an initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control winnings to the probability variable switch 65a5 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing to output a notification effect (in this control example, a voice saying "Look at the liquid crystal") to attract the player's attention. In this control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (30 seconds have elapsed since 10 balls hit the variable winning device 65). This notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 in the process of S1402 of the notification process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 97). Based on the fact that the notification counter 203m becomes 0, a notification command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is set. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this command, it executes the process for outputting the audio described above.

With this configuration, before the start of the 13th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output, so the player can watch the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal display. Keep an eye on 81. Here, although the details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to look at the third symbol display device 81. The word "Attention" is displayed as a notification. In the 13th round, the channel solenoid 65k operates, so if the player watches the operation, the type of jackpot being executed will be determined based on the operating period of the channel solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to maintain the expectation that the variable probability game state will be given to the player until the end of the jackpot game, the player can control the movement of the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. An announcement is being made that makes it difficult to see. However, when the 12th round ends, there is a risk that the player may look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, the player is notified by voice to watch the third symbol display device 81. A notification effect will be executed. Thereby, the player's attention can be drawn to the displayed content after the interval performance is executed, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In this control example, the player's attention is diverted from the switching member 65h by notifying the user to show the third symbol display device 81. However, the present control example is not limited to this. By notifying the player to place his or her hand over the device 65, the player may be notified of the movement of the switching member 65h so that it is hidden by the player's hand. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and a configuration may be adopted in which the player's attention is diverted by notifying the player to look at the decorative lamp 34 or the like. Furthermore, during the 12th round, a three-dimensional code or the like may be displayed and a notification urging the player to read it with a mobile phone may be configured to distract the player's attention. In this control example, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h is completed is set as the distraction effect. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether it is a jackpot A or a jackpot B based on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable prize winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is updated by incrementing it by 1 (see S1605 in FIG. 99). The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be ejected has elapsed. is the counter.

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the winning game ball to be ejected from the variable winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round ends. This is a counter for determining whether the time has elapsed. In this control example, the time required for the variable winning device 65 to eject a winning game ball is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance to the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203p. is set as . Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203p has reached its upper limit (3 seconds in this control example), it is determined whether the number of winnings entered into the variable winning device 65 and the number of winnings ejected match. S1607 in FIG. 99). If they do not match, an error command is set and this fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, by illegally leaving the game ball in the variable prize winning device 65 and applying an impact at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than it actually does, resulting in a jackpot B. It is also possible to suppress fraud in passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65a5.

In addition, if the winning number and the number of ejected pieces do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if the flag is on, even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change setting flag 203h is not turned on. A configuration may be configured in which this setting is not set to on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the unfair granting of variable probability gaming states.

The probability variation valid flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not to make the passage valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When this probability change valid flag 203q is set to ON, based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, the game ball that last won into the specific winning opening 65a passes through the probability change switch 65a5. This indicates that no amount of time has passed. That is, it shows that it is a period in which it is possible for a game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65a5.

The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation validity flag 203q described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65a5 by using the variable variable valid timer 203r. In this control example, the time required for the game ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variable valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variable switch 65a5 is passed after that, it is determined to be fraudulent and is not determined to have passed.

As a result, it is possible to illegally change the switching member 65h and cause the game ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65a5, or push up the game ball with a piano wire or the like from below the variable variable switch 65a5 and cause the game ball to pass through the variable variable switch 65a5, It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud caused by radio waves, etc., causing the magnetic sensor to falsely detect passage.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (not shown) in one round. This ejected number counter 203s is reset to the initial value 0 after the number of winning game balls and the ejected number are determined by the variable winning device 65 (S1611 in FIG. 99).

The time saving medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving gaming state. This time saving medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in this control example, if the variable probability game state is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time saving game state for 100 times.

The omen flag 203u is used to acquire winning information that will result in a jackpot when the game transitions to the variable probability gaming state, and to obtain winning information that is already on hold (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b). This is a flag indicating that winning information that results in a jackpot A (that is, there is a possibility of shifting to a variable probability gaming state) is stored in the information). In the prefetching process (see FIG. 88), when winning information that will result in a jackpot when the game state shifts to a variable probability gaming state is acquired (S507 in FIG. 88: Yes), this sign flag 203u changes based on the winning information. If it is determined that there is a possibility that the game is in a variable probability gaming state when the game starts (that is, there is winning information that results in a jackpot A by then) (S508 in FIG. 88: Yes), it is set to on. Ru. Then, a winning information command indicating that the omen flag 203u has been turned on is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 (see S511 in FIG. 88). Then, in the ending process executed at the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 96), when the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (that is, when the transition to the variable probability gaming state) (see S1304 in FIG. 96), Set to off. Although not shown, in the ending process (FIG. 96), if it is determined that the jackpot game based on the winning information for which the sign flag 203u is turned on has ended (that is, the jackpot game of jackpot A was executed, In the case where the transition to the variable probability gaming state is not made, the omen flag 203u is also set to OFF.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, etc. are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 91) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 includes the main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, and other devices 228 (slide motor 311, rotation motor 431, reversing motor 531). , a sub-LED 290, a clock generator (CLK) 900, and the like are connected to the sub-LED 290 and the like.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to the device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

The slide motor 311 is a motor for sliding and moving the display surface 523a, which is the upper display surface 523a1 of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, in a direction parallel to the gaming machine, and is composed of a stepping motor. Further, the rotation motor 431 is a motor for rotating the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in parallel with the gaming machine 10, and is composed of a stepping motor. The reversing motor 531 is composed of a stepping motor that is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 about an axis parallel to the gaming machine 10. The reversing motor 531 includes a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and a motor for rotating (reversing) the lower display surface 523a2. 523a2 can be rotated independently. The reversing motor 531 is a motor for independently rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 521a1 and the lower display surface 531a2 into a state where the display area faces the front side and a state where the display area faces the back side. It is.

The sub-LED 290 is arranged on a decorative surface 523b1 formed on the back side of the upper display surface 523a1, and when the upper display surface 523a1 is reversed, the decorative pattern Z ( The present invention is configured to notify the player that the special symbols are changing by blinking instead of the symbol used to notify the player that the special symbols are changing.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

The clock generator 900 is a device that outputs a clock signal that changes every 100 ms to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. This clock generating device 900 is a device for supplying a synchronizing signal for controlling the sub-LED 290 and the decorative pattern Z to blink at the same timing in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. As a result, even when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed and moved to a position overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the sub-LED 290 is made to blink at 0 in synchronization with the displayed decorative symbol Z. By displaying this, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbols are changing and to prevent the player from becoming confused.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, an over winning table 222b, an ending table 222c, a sub-liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, and other various items necessary for controlling the game. Data, programs, etc. are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (missing, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The audio lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the validity determination result, and the acquired selection counter value. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing general information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress the problem of players getting bored of the game early.

The over-winning table 222b is a table for selecting an over-winning effect to be executed when a game ball over-wins into the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65.

Here, details of the over winning table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the over winning table 222b. The over winning table 222b is a table used to select an over winning effect in a jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. 76(a), the over winning table 222b includes a winning over winning table 222b1 and a predictive over winning table. 222b2 and an over winning table 222b3 are provided.

The winning over winning table 222b1 is a table used when there is winning information that becomes a jackpot among the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 76(b), in the hit/over winning table 222b1, performance contents to be selected as the over winning performance are defined in accordance with the value of the performance counter 223f, and regulations differ depending on the number of rounds. It becomes.

Specifically, when the number of rounds is 1 to 10, if the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 149", the performance content of the over winning performance is "none" (that is, not executed), and " If it is 150-198, it will be a bubble, and if it is 199, it will be a school of fish.

"School of fish" is selected as the performance content of the over winning performance only when the over winning winning table 222b1 is used (that is, when there is winning information that becomes a jackpot among the held winning information). By displaying a "school of fish" effect as an over winning effect, it is possible to suggest (notify) the player that there is winning information that will result in a jackpot among the winning information that has been withheld.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 99", the performance content of the over winning performance is "none" (that is, not executed), and is "100 to 189". If it is "190-199", it is a "bubble" and a "school of fish". In this way, as the round in the jackpot game progresses, by configuring it so that the over winning effect indicating that there is a high expectation that winning information that will become a jackpot is being held is likely to be displayed, the jackpot game can be improved. Even if the game lasts for a long time, the player's interest can be improved.

In the prediction over winning table 222b2, there is winning information that will result in a jackpot if it moves to the variable probability gaming state among the pending winning information, and the winning information will change to the variable probability gaming state by the time fluctuations based on the pending winning information start. This table is used when there is a possibility of transition to (that is, when it is not certain that there will be a jackpot after that, but there is a high possibility that it will be a jackpot).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(c), when the number of rounds is 1 to 10, if the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 149", the performance content of the over winning performance is "None". ” (in other words, it will not be executed), and if it is “150 to 199”, it will be “bubble”.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 99", the performance content of the over winning performance is "none" (that is, not executed), and is "100 to 199". If it is, it will be a "foam".

The over-win winning table 222b3 is a table used when there is no winning information that becomes a jackpot among the held winning information.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(d), when the number of rounds is 1 to 10, if the value of the performance counter 223g is "0 to 179", the performance content of the over winning performance is "None". ” (that is, it will not be executed), and if it is “180 to 199”, it will be “bubble”.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 159", the performance content of the over winning performance is "none" (that is, not executed), and is "160 to 199". If it is, it will be a "foam".

In this way, the over-missing winning table 222b3 is configured so that "bubbles" are less likely to be selected as the over-winning effect compared to the sign over-winning table 222b2. As a result, when "bubbles" are displayed as an over winning effect, the player can be made to expect a jackpot afterwards, and the player's interest can be increased.

In this control example, one of the three types of "none", "bubble", and "school of fish" is selected as the over-winning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to select from four types, or it may naturally be configured to select from two types. Furthermore, the content of the performance may be configured such that "none" (that is, not executed) is not selected, so that the over-win performance is displayed every time there is an over-win. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy for players to understand that they have won an over-win.

Furthermore, information indicating the number of game balls that have won an over-win may be displayed as an over-win presentation. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily grasp the number of game balls that have won over.

Furthermore, the performance may be varied depending on the number of game balls that have won over. This makes it possible for the player to pay attention to the number of game balls that have won an excessive amount of winnings, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Next, details of the ending table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ending table 222c. The ending table 222c is a table used to select the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. 77(a), the ending table 222c includes a winning ending table 222c1, a predictive ending table 222c2, and , and a detached ending table 222c3 are provided.

The winning ending table 222c1 is a table used when there is winning information that becomes a jackpot among the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77(b), the winning ending table 222c1 defines the value of the performance counter 223f and the content of the performance selected as the ending performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(b), when the value of the performance counter 223g is "0 to 19", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the performance content of the ending performance, In the case of "20 to 59", "foam" is selected, in the case of "60 to 99", "special bubble" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 199", "school of fish" is selected.

In the predictive ending table 222c2, there is winning information that will result in a jackpot if it shifts to the fixed variable gaming state among the pending winning information, and the transition to the fixed variable gaming state occurs before the fluctuation based on the suspended winning information starts. This table is used when there is a possibility of migration.

As shown in FIG. 77(c), the value of the performance counter 223f and the content of the performance selected as the ending performance are defined in the predictive ending table 222c2, and "bubbles" are specified as the over winning performance during the jackpot game. The regulations differ depending on the number of times (the value of the bubble number counter 223j) that has been selected.

Specifically, when the value of the bubble number counter 223j is "0 to 4" and the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 149", the production content of the ending production is "none" (that is, it is not executed). ) is selected, "foam" is selected if it is "150-179", and "special foam" is selected if it is "180-199".

Furthermore, if the value of the bubble count counter 223j is "5 to 15" and the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 99", "None" (that is, not executed) is selected as the production content of the ending production. If the number is "100 to 159", "foam" is selected, and if it is "160 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

If the value of the bubble count counter 223j is "16 or more" and the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 49", "None" (that is, not executed) is selected as the production content of the ending production, and " If the number is 50 to 99, "foam" is selected, and if the number is 100 to 199, "special foam" is selected.

In this way, if the "bubble" effect is often displayed as an over winning effect, the ending effect of "bubble" or "special bubble", which suggests that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot, is likely to be selected. It is configured as follows. As a result, even though a large number of "bubbles" were selected (displayed) in the over-winning presentation, a less expected presentation (for example, "none") was selected in the ending presentation, causing the player to lose interest in the game. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a decline in motivation.

Furthermore, when the ending performance is selected using the predictive ending table 222c2, there is a high possibility that a jackpot will occur afterwards. Therefore, if many "bubbles" effects are displayed as over-winning effects, the effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot is likely to be selected.In other words, the reliability of the displayed effect is high. It will become. As a result, it is possible to provide a benefit that the reliability of the ending effect increases as the number of over-winning game balls increases, thereby increasing the player's interest.

The losing ending table 222c3 is a table used when there is no winning information that will result in a jackpot if the game changes to the probability-changing gaming state among the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77(d), the value of the performance counter 223f and the content of the performance selected as the ending performance are defined in the missing ending table 222c2.

Specifically, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 159", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the production content of the ending production, and if it is "160 to 189", "bubble" is selected. is selected, and if it is "190-199", "special foam" is selected.

In addition, in this control example, the regulation of the value of the performance counter 223f and the content of the performance is changed only in the predictive ending table 222c2 according to the value of the number of bubbles counter 223j, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same may naturally be applied to the winning ending table 222c1 and the losing ending table 222c3.

Next, the sub-liquid crystal drive scenario 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 78. The sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d includes a motor for driving various motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversal motor 531) for varying the upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal device 523. information is stored.

Specifically, a slide drive scenario 222d1 for driving a slide motor 431 that slides the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, and a rotational movement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in the circumferential direction. A rotational drive scenario 222d2 for driving the rotational motor 311 to rotate the upper display surface 523a1 and a reversal driving scenario 222d3 for driving the reversal motor 531 for reversing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, respectively.

First, the contents of the slide drive scenario 222d1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 78(b). The slide drive scenario 222d1 includes setting values (operating speed (pps), (number of operation steps and direction of operation) are defined.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), an operation for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the separated position to the close position in response to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m (outward movement The information related to the operation of the system is stored. Specifically, 50 pps is defined as the operating speed, 100 is defined as the number of operating steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operating direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431. Note that 100 steps means the number of steps from the remote position to the close position.

Here, the operating speed of 50 pps means that 50 pulses (steps) are output per second to the motor driver, so the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 operate 100 steps (move from a distant position to a close position). The time required to do this is 100/50 seconds (2 seconds).

Corresponding to the value "5001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, information related to an operation (return operation) for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is stored. There is. Specifically, 50 pps is defined as the operating speed, 100 is defined as the number of operating steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operating direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431.

Here, since the driving scenario counter 223m is a counter that is incremented by 1 every 1 ms, the reason why the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is "5001" is because the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are located at a close position. This is 5 seconds after the slide displacement to the separated position is started (that is, 3 seconds after the slide displacement for 2 seconds is completed).

Information of "END" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value "7001" of the driving scenario counter 223m. The value of the drive scenario counter 223m becomes "7001" two seconds after the start of the operation to slide the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position (i.e., (when the sliding displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is completed). By reading this "END" data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

In this way, in the slide drive scenario 222d1, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 slide from the separated position to the close position over a period of 2 seconds, after which they are maintained at the separated position for 3 seconds, and then again. It takes seconds to slide from the close position to the far position.

Next, the contents of the rotation drive scenario 222d2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 78(c). Similarly, the rotational drive scenario 222d2 has a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) in response to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time since the start of the variable display. , number of motion steps, and direction of motion) are defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78(c), in response to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 move to the first rotational position (upper display from the second rotation position (a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the first rotation position, where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 become left and right) Information related to the movement (outward movement) for rotating in the circumferential direction to the position) is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is defined as the operating speed, 360 is defined as the number of operating steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operating direction.

In response to the value "8001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, an operation for rotating the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in the circumferential direction from the second rotation position to the first rotation position (return operation ) is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is defined as the operating speed, 360 is defined as the number of operating steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operating direction.

Information of "END" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value "12001" of the driving scenario counter 223m.

In this way, in the rotation drive scenario 222d2, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 rotate from the first rotation position to the second rotation position over a period of 3 seconds, and then rotate to the second rotation position for 5 seconds. After that, it rotates again from the second rotation position to the first position over a period of 3 seconds.

Next, the contents of the reversal drive scenario 222d3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 78(d). Similarly, the reversal drive scenario 222d3 has a setting value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) in response to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time since the start of the variable display. , number of motion steps, and direction of motion) are defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78(d), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the normal position (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are on the front side) in response to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m. Information related to the operation (outward movement) for reversing the object from the position where the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are on the front side to the reversing position (the position where the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are on the front side) is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is defined as the operating speed, 180 is defined as the number of operating steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operating direction.

Corresponding to the value "5001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, information related to the operation for reversing the sub liquid crystal display device 523 from the reverse position to the normal position (return operation) is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is defined as the operating speed, 180 is defined as the number of operating steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operating direction.

Information of "END" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value "8001" of the driving scenario counter 223m.

In this manner, in the reversal drive scenario 222d3, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed from the normal position to the reversed position over a period of 2 seconds, then maintained at the reversed position for 3 seconds, and then returned from the reversed position to the normal position over 2 seconds. Flip into position.

Note that in this control example, each drive scenario specifies the operation for one motor, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a driving scenario may be defined in which the reversing motor 531 is driven after the sliding motor 431 is driven. Thereby, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 can be slid to a close position and then reversed. As a result, the number of variations in which the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 can be driven (displaced) increases, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 75, the explanation will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(b). As shown in FIG. 75(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop ball counter 223b. Type selection flag 223e, performance counter 223f, round number counter 223g, sub prize winning number counter 223h, fish school flag 223i, bubble number counter 223j, clock counter 223k, drive scenario counter 223m, drive scenario storage area 223n, other memory area 223z, is provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of reserved balls and the like before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable performance (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of balls on hold (the number of times of standby) of variable effects held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of pending balls is When the number of balls is subtracted, a held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1907 in FIG. 102). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved pitches for display, it displays reserved pitches corresponding to the value of the number of reserved pitches indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved pitch counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, so Detailed explanation will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the variation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2302 in FIG. 106). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 102), and turned off when the stop type is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2309 in FIG. 106). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The performance counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 and is used for preview performances and various lottery games. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. This round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S2004 in FIG. 103), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S2013 in FIG. 103). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when selecting an over winning effect in the over winning process (see FIG. 104). By varying the selection ratio of the over winning performance according to the value of the round number counter 223g, the over winning performance can be selected (displayed) at a different ratio for each round.

The sub prize winning number counter 223h is a counter for determining the number of winning prizes in the specific winning hole 65a within a round of the jackpot game. The sub winning number counter 223h is updated according to the winning number command received from the main controller 110 (see S2007 in FIG. 103), and depending on the value of the sub winning number counter 223h, it is a normal winning or an over winning. (See S2008 in FIG. 103). Although not shown, it is initialized to 0 when a new round number command is received.

The fish school flag 223i is a flag for determining whether or not the "fish school" effect has been selected (displayed) in the over winning effect. The fish school flag 223i is set to ON when the "fish school" over winning effect is selected in the over winning process (see FIG. 104) (see S2109 in FIG. 104), and is set to OFF in the ending setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 104). (See S2210 in FIG. 105). In the ending setting process (see FIG. 105), if the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201 in FIG. 105: Yes), the continuous ending effect is selected as the ending effect. Thereby, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that effects suggesting that a variable probability gaming state will be given are repeatedly executed (displayed) and give a sense of discomfort to the player. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent a so-called fall-out in which, even though a "school of fish" effect is displayed as an over-winning effect, a "bubbles" effect is displayed in the subsequent ending effect.

The bubble number counter 223j is a counter for determining the number of times the "bubbles" effect is selected as an over winning effect. The bubble number counter 223j is incremented by 1 when the "bubbles" over winning effect is selected in the over winning process (see FIG. 104) (see S2111 in FIG. 104), and is initialized to 0 in the ending setting process. (See S2211 in FIG. 105). The value of this bubble count counter 223j is used when selecting an ending effect in the ending setting process (see FIG. 105).

The clock counter 223k is a 16-bit counter that is counted in response to changes in the clock input from the clock generator 900 and is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535. The clock of this clock generator 900 is also input to the display control device 114, and by performing the presentation based on the value of the clock counter 223k, it is possible to synchronize the presentation with the display control device 114.

Specifically, in the ramp editing process (see FIG. 107), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The performance timing is determined based on the value of this clock counter 223k. For example, when the value of the clock counter 223k reaches 1000, the lighting of the sub-LED 290 and the display of the sub-symbol are started, and when the value of the clock counter 223k reaches 1002, the sub-LED 290 is turned off and the sub-symbol is hidden. It is determined.

Note that the clock of the clock generator 900 changes at a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock with a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 100 ms. Therefore, if it is desired to start an effect such as turning on an LED after 2 seconds, it may be decided to start the effect from the value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when the value is 65535 and is incremented by 1.

The clock of the clock generator 900 is not limited to one that changes once every 100 ms (that is, a clock with a frequency of 5 Hz). For example, it may change at a cycle of once every 50 ms (that is, a clock with a frequency of 10 Hz), or it may change at a cycle of once every 500 ms (that is, a clock whose frequency is 1 Hz). When the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 becomes higher (that is, the interval at which it changes becomes shorter), the update interval of the clock counter 223k may also be configured to become shorter. Thereby, even if the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 increases, the clock counter 223k can be updated without missing the change.

The drive scenario counter 223m is a counter for determining the timing to execute control of various drive motors. The drive scenario counter 223m is set to 0 when a variation pattern in which a drive scenario is set is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305 in FIG. 106: Yes). Then, in the sub-liquid crystal drive process (FIG. 108) executed every 1 ms, if a drive scenario is set in a drive scenario storage area 223n, which will be described later, it is incremented by 1. According to the value of this drive scenario counter 223m, information for driving the motors set in the drive scenario storage area 223n is acquired, and various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531 ) is driven and controlled.

The drive scenario storage area 223n is an area for storing the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d stored in the ROM 222 described above. The driving scenario storage area 223m stores the corresponding driving scenario 222d when a fluctuation pattern in which a driving scenario is set is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305: Yes in FIG. 106). Ru. Based on the drive scenario information stored in the drive scenario storage area 223m, various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, and reversal motor 531) are drive-controlled.

The other memory area 223z also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 102) of the voice ramp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, etc., and controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. It controls variable effects) and preview effects.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, etc., and controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. It controls variable effects) and preview effects.

FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 and the clock generator 900 are connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the bus line. 240. The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Furthermore, a third symbol display device 81 and a sub-liquid crystal display (LCD) 523 are connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided in order to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store the control program and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, read operations are performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) that is executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 83), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the image in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next one frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 sends the data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw an image; It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted. Therefore, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which has a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeated until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b is displayed when a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the game is started by the player and the power-on variation image area 235b is moved to the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the ball is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, back A corresponding to the "city stage", back B corresponding to the "sky stage", and back C corresponding to the "island stage") are all displayed on the third symbol display device. The image is horizontally longer than the display area displayed at 81, and the image controller 237 causes the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the back image from left to right in the horizontal direction. is drawn. Thereby, the back images are scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth manner.

The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 5), numbered from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance, the third symbol display device 81 does not display the variable effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance is not started immediately.

In addition, the third symbol area 235d includes main symbols that are not numbered from "0" to "9" and include a main symbol consisting of a backward symbol such as a wooden box, a backward symbol and a character such as a plane, a wrapping cloth, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of an auxiliary pattern imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character pattern area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes it to the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading resident image data in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to process the drawing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a display clock counter 233m, a lighting clock storage area 233n, a drive data storage area 233p, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to command-related displays, round performances, and demo performances are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss is finally displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

By notifying the time period of the normal symbol in the ending performance, the player can easily recognize the time period of the normal symbol. The longer the time period for this normal symbol, the more opportunities the ball will have to pass through the normal ball entry port 67, so there will be more chances for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will be more chances for the normal symbol to win. . Therefore, there are more opportunities for the electric accessory to be released due to the jackpot of the normal symbol, making it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640, and making it easier for the special symbol to be drawn. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, and the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot.This increases the player's desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the second winning hole 640 is a winning hole where when a ball enters, five balls are paid out as prize balls, so it becomes a jackpot with a normal symbol, an electric accessory is released, and the ball is sent to the second winning hole. The easier it is to hit 640, the more prize balls you get. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to reduce or the number of balls it has does not decrease even if it plays a game, so the player can be in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to decrease or the number of balls it has is You can get a sense of a period of time when you can get a jackpot with a special symbol even if you don't have one. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's desire to participate in the game, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending performance, by informing that one of the special symbol lottery results that are pending will be a special symbol jackpot, the player can win the special symbol in the pending special symbol lottery. Since the player can recognize that it will be a jackpot with a special symbol, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player will definitely get a jackpot with a special symbol. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demo performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with a starting prize is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to a display related to game information related commands, a display related to jackpot related commands, a round performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. If the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image displayed on the back side of the sprite will be. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2,...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite is defined for each address, such as effects for expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, etc. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back surface is determined by displaying one of the back surfaces A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (any of the "city stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or displaying the back surface A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player. Information specifying whether a back image different from C is to be displayed is described. Further, in the case of specifying that a back image different from back images A to C is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If the back surface type specifies that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. , and also specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from back images A to C is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

In this control example, a case will be explained in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuating performance that is being performed this time, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the last address of the display data table (in the example of FIG. 21) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 83), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the process of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operations, so the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, among the image data of sprites used in the production specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all of the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 82). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined in association with an address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 82 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 82, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (a power-on main image and a power-on variable image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to on during the main processing (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111(b)) and a simple display setting process are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2912 in FIG. 111(b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 124) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 83), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for the image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and writes an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 83), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 83), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 111(b ), pointer update processing (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 83), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite (design) is described for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , pending pitch number symbol 1, pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , error symbol), and detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in this order.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 111 (b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 111(b)) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The display clock counter 233m is a 16-bit counter that is counted in response to changes in the clock input from the clock generator 900 and is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535. The clock of this clock generator 900 is also input to the audio lamp control device 113, and by performing the presentation based on the value of the display clock counter 223m, it is possible to easily synchronize the presentation with the audio lamp control device 113. can be done.

Specifically, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The clock of the clock generator 900 changes once every 100 ms (that is, the clock has a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 100 ms. Therefore, if it is desired to start an effect such as lighting up an LED after two seconds, it may be decided to start the effect from the value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when the value is 65535 and is incremented by 1.

Although the details will be described later, the configuration is such that the clock generation device 900 starts outputting the clock after the start-up process of the display control device 114 (see S2601 to S2606 in FIG. 109) is completed. As a result, after the start-up processing of the display control device 114, which takes more time than the sound lamp control device 113, is completed (that is, the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 is completed). ), the output of the clock starts, so the values of the clock counters (clock counter 223k and display clock counter 233m) can be accurately synchronized.

The drive data storage area 233p is an area for storing drive data for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523 set by the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 80, the drive data storage area 233p includes a slide amount storage area 233p1, a rotation amount storage area 233p2, and a reversal amount storage area 233p3.

This drive data storage area 233p is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 when the various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are set to be driven in the audio lamp control device 113. The drive data is set based on the reception of the drive data command (see S3017 in FIG. 112).

Then, in the drawing correction process (see FIG. 125), the display coordinates, display angle, etc. of each image constituting one sprite are corrected according to the drive data stored in the drive data storage area 233p. Thereby, even when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 are slid or rotated, suitable effects can be displayed.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration performance is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that a demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that a demonstration is not being performed. This demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and is It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 in FIG. 115(a), etc.). This demo display flag 233y makes it easy to determine whether or not a demonstration is currently being performed.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the final display performance refers to a performance in which the stopped symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern (determined display). If this final display flag 233z is on, it means that a final display performance is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a final display performance is not in progress. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and when the fixed display data table is It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 in FIG. 115(a), etc.). With this confirmed display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not a confirmed display performance is currently being performed.

<About the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 84 to 99. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this control example). 299, 99, and 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). Thereafter, a starting winning process accompanying a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate as the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is executed. Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. After executing the through gate passage process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game); This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of a jackpot game of symbols. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If it is not a special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value has been changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 93) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. These are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command through the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S270), and the value is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the variable time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is set (S215). . Setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. be exposed. More specifically, whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, it is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a jackpot A, a small hit, or a miss.

In this control example, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LEDs are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Further, if it is a small win, a red LED is turned on, and if it is a loss, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is displayed. It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the lottery result this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening the specific winning hole is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the setting for the start of jackpot A (such as 16 rounds) is set. jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is a failure (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203t is greater than or equal to 1 (S220: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S221).

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment of success or failure). This is a process for determining the performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of the variable performance performed on the symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are , the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g in the RAM 203 is on (S302).

If the probability variable flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is determined based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability times. The lottery result of whether or not the result is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73(c)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 10 random numbers set in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 73(c)). As mentioned above, 10 random numbers from 0 to 9 are set as the special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a jackpot. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

In addition, in this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but they are not limited to this, and may be different random numbers. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be a loss in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the bias of jackpots.

In addition, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined to be a jackpot. The number of random values may be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed using the special symbol with a higher jackpot probability, the player This can create expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) with special symbols, so the first Based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability times (see FIG. 73(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability times. A random number of ``9'' is set as the random number for the special symbol jackpot, and if the value of the first random number counter C1 and this random number match, the special symbol will be a jackpot. It is determined that After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of jackpot indicating jackpot A is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74(a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the special symbol is a miss (S305: No), a display mode at the time of a miss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is set according to the determined miss. Next, a variation pattern at the time of a miss is determined based on the current number of reserved pitches (S309). After that, this process ends.

Although not shown, a variation pattern command is generated to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern. When this process is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, starting winning information processing (S105) will be explained. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and suspending their values when there is a random number counter.

When the starting winning process (FIG. 87, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) or not (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first prize opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, there is no winning in the first winning hole 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning hole 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process moves to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning hole 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d that has been changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 93) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S405, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing as the processing from S401 to S406 is performed for the winning prize in the second winning hole 640. The only difference is that a reservation process is executed for the second special symbol in response to a win in the second winning hole 640, and the other processes are the same, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. If it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole (S407: No), a pre-reading process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the pre-reading process (S413) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S413).

In this pre-reading process (FIG. 88, S413), first, it is determined whether there is a new winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (S501; No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (S501: Yes), the process moves to S502.

In the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is variable with probability (S502), and if the gaming state is variable with probability (S502: Yes), the high probability time of the first winning random number table 202a is determined. A lottery result is obtained based on the jackpot determination value (S503), and the process moves to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if the gaming state is not certain (S502: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the jackpot judgment value at low probability in the first random number table 202a (S504), and the process of S505 is performed. Move.

In the process of S505, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S503 or S504 is a jackpot (S505). In the process of S505, if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S505: Yes), a winning information command indicating a jackpot and including the jackpot type is set (S506), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S505, if it is determined that the lottery result is a loss (S505: No), then if the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a variable probability gaming state, it is determined whether the lottery result will be a jackpot. It is determined (S507).

In the process of S507, even if the gaming state at the start of variation is a variable gaming state, if the lottery result is a loss (S507: No), a winning information command indicating a loss is set (S508), and the winning information command is set. Finish the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S507, if it is determined that the lottery result will be a jackpot if the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the variable probability gaming state (S507: Yes), then the state shifts to the variable probability state at the start of the variation. It is determined whether there is a possibility that the Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not there is winning information that will become a jackpot and shift to a variable probability state among the winning information that is changing or the winning information that is on hold.

In the process of S508, if there is no possibility of transitioning to the variable probability state at the start of fluctuation (that is, there is no winning information of a jackpot that will transition to the variable probability gaming state) (S508: No), the winning indicating a loss. An information command is set (S509), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S508, if there is a possibility that the state has shifted to the probability variable state at the start of the fluctuation (that is, there is winning information of a jackpot that will shift to the probability variable gaming state) (S508: Yes), the high probability The lottery result is obtained based on the jackpot judgment values for the low probability and low probability jackpots (S520). Then, the omen flag 203u is set to on (S511), indicating that the omen flag 203u is on, and a winning information command including the respective lottery results obtained in the process of S520 is set (S512), and the main process end.

Here, in this control example, it cannot be determined whether or not the variable probability game state is provided until the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65a5 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in this control example, by executing the processes of S507 to S512, if there is winning information that is a jackpot that can pass through the variable probability switch 65a5, the lottery results at high probability and low probability are displayed. It can be acquired and notified to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can display an appropriate effect whether or not a variable probability gaming state is provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and is used to display the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device and the electric winning combination associated with the second winning hole 640. This is a process for controlling things such as opening time.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 89, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is winning, the second symbol display device is displaying the winning symbol, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the first prize opening 64 is controlled to open and close. Includes monaka. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S601: Yes), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is changed. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of times M of pending variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols (S608).

If the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state for normal symbols (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S609). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game); This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of a jackpot game of symbols. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S609: Yes), the process moves to S611.

In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second symbol winning random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number per symbol counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the second random number per symbol table 202c for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 73(c)).

In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S608: No), the process moves to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low Based on the second winning random number table 202c for probability, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 73(c)).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S612: Yes) , sets the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols (S614: Yes), it is currently in the jackpot of special symbols. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S615: Yes), the process moves to S617. In this control example, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible during a special symbol jackpot, even if the normal symbol is a hit, the same procedure as when the normal symbol is missed is performed. , the number of opening times and opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a accompanying this is set to 1 second, and the number of openings is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S614: No), the process moves to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is set to 0. .2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (S617), and the process moves to S619.

In the process of S612, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols (S619: Yes), a variable display is displayed on the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S619: No), the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is ended. In this way, except during jackpots of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of the variable display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and furthermore, Since the release period of the second winning hole 640 becomes very long, ``0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times'', it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. However, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a halt state (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 89, S106) is It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol win (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to start (S625), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is outside the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 90, S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol held ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved pitch number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process moves to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S912 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S912 in such a case. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 93, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, in the case where the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S913, S914) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S909), and the process moves to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. Next, interrupts are permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing (see FIG. 93), first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing to be sent to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, it is determined whether there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 87) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 94) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning apparatus 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 (S1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), a variation display according to the variation pattern is changed to the first symbol display. It starts in devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, that red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is finished, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 86). , 37B is displayed as stopped (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the second symbol display device (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89), variable display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device After the display is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89). )do.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process moves to S1001, and the processes from S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S1009: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1001 to S1007 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 91 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1013). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process in S1001, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 94, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various performances according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of specific prize openings ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 94, S1004), first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is to be started. In the process of S1101, if a special symbol jackpot is to be started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1103). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S1103: No), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, if it is determined that the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (S1105). FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 95, S1105), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set based on the data read in the process of S1201. After that, this process ends. In addition, in the process of S1202, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

Then, the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1204), a round number command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1205), and this processing is ended.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, the jackpot game will not end prematurely. Problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 94, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), then it is determined whether it is the operating timing of the variable probability solenoid 65k (S1106). If it is determined that it is the timing to operate the variable variable solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the variable variable solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1107), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1106, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1108). The start timing of the ending effect is when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (in this control example, 3 seconds), which is the ball removal time, has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending performance (S1108: Yes), the probability change solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1109), and the ending process is executed (S1110). After that, this process ends. Although not shown, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to OFF. However, in consideration of the case where the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to OFF in the process of S1009 just in case.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1110) will be explained with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 96, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 96, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of an ending is set in the audio lamp control device 113 (S1301). It is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S1302). In the process of S1302, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1302: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set on (S1303), and this process ends. Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203h is off (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the present process ends.

In this way, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the variable probability setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the variable probability flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set the probability variation by determining whether the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65a5. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting the transition to the variable probability gaming state until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if a game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65a5 during a jackpot game, the probability change gaming state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 during a jackpot game is determined. You can play the game with interest.

Returning to FIG. 94, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), a notification process is executed (S1111). Here, details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1401). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1401: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402). The end timing of the 12th round is determined based on whether it is detected that 10 balls have been won in the 12th round or when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1402: No), this process ends. Here, by setting the 2-second counter in S1403, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the time to throw the ball after 12 rounds, and a voice saying "Look at the LCD" is heard. Output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player's attention is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable prize winning device 65 is recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the variable probability game state will be awarded until the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect that draws attention to the LCD is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the display is not limited to this. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1401: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1404). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405: Yes), a notification command is set (S1406). After that, this process ends. In response to this notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 executes settings for outputting the audio message "Look at the liquid crystal."

Returning to FIG. 94, the explanation will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 97, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, this winning process (S1112) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1501). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is outside the valid period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning a prize opening 65a has been passed. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1502: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated, and a winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203j is issued. Set (S1503). After that, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the light has not passed through the detection switch 65c1 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504). When it is determined that the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504: Yes), closing of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1506). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set on (S1507). After that, the process of S1508 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown out after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1504, if it is determined that the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1505). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1505: Yes), the process of S1506 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1505: No), the process of S1508 is executed.

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1508). If it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1508: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is updated by -1 (S1509). It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable passing switch 65e3 (S1510: Yes), the value of the variable passing counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1511). The probability change setting flag 203h is set on (S1512). After that, the process of S1513 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1510, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510: No), the process of S1513 is executed. In the process of S1513, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1513). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1514). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set on (S1515). After that, this process ends. Here, by setting the variable probability valid flag 203q to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special channel 65e2 passes the variable variable switch 65a5, the variable variable game is switched on. can be controlled so that it is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1508, if it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1508: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1516). If the probability variation valid flag 203q is off (S1516: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1516: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation validity timer 203r to update it (S1517). It is determined whether the value of the variable valid timer is an upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1518). If it is determined that the variable variable validity timer 203r is at the upper limit value (S1518: Yes), the variable variable validity flag 203q is set to OFF (S1519). The variable probability valid timer 203r is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1518, if it is determined that the probability variable effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1518: No), the process of S1510 is executed.

As a result, if the variable probability valid timer 203r is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65a5, so the variable probability gaming state can be set in consideration of the time of ball brushing. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being improperly passed through the variable probability switch 65a5 and to be given a variable probability gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 94, the explanation will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112) is executed, abnormality processing is executed (S1113). After that, this process ends. Here, details of this abnormality processing (S1113) will be explained with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), processing is executed to monitor whether or not the probability change switch 65a5 has been improperly passed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 99, S1113), first, it is determined whether the round validity period is reached (S1601). If it is outside the round validity period (S1601: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball ejection port switch 65e4 (S1602). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball ejection port switch 65e4 (S1602: Yes), the value of the ball ejected number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (S1603). After that, the process of S1604 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that no game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: No), the process of S1604 is executed.

In the process of S1604, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is updated by incrementing the remaining ball timer 203p by 1 (S1605), since it is during the pitch time period. The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether an upper limit value (in this control example, 3 seconds) has elapsed (S1606). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (S1606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1606: Yes), the number of ejected pieces (the total value of the variable passing counter 203i and the ejected number counter 203s) and the number of winning pieces (the value of the winning number counter 203j) match. (S1607).

If it is determined that they match (S1607: Yes), the process of S1609 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1607: No), an error command is set (S1608). After that, the process of S1609 is executed. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud in which game balls are left in the variable winning device 65 and the game balls are passed through the probability change switch 65a5 even if it is a jackpot B.

In the process of S1609, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1609), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1610). Thereafter, the prize winning number counter 203j, the ejecting number counter 203s, and the variable passing counter 203i are each reset to their initial values (S1611), and then this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 108. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 100, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "momentary power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S1815 (see Figure 101). ) is started during execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 101, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1814 in FIG. 101), it executes the power-off process in S1815. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1815 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1702: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S1815 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1703).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process moves to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process moves to S1708.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process moves to S1704. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1817 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process moves to S1708.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1702: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process in S1817, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1704, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S1706). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S1708, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1817 is executed (see S1816 in FIG. 101). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1817 is executed, so the reason why the process in S1708 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1817 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1709), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1710), the interrupt Permission is set (S1711) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S1708 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after, for example, the power was completely shut off. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S1710, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1710), interrupt permission is set. (S1711), and the process moves to main processing.

Note that the reason for skipping the clearing process in S1709 is that when the process reaches S1708 from S1704 via the process in S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1704. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main processing was started or the current processing in S1801 was executed (S1801), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the current processing in S1801 was executed. If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1813 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1811. In the process of S1801, determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is because S1802 to S1811 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process in S1813 and the command determination process in S1812 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S1812 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S1813 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1803 to S1813 are sent to the display control device 114 (S1802 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808, which will be described later (S1803), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S1804). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1805 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1805, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the pending number display update process, a process is performed in which a pending lamp (not shown) is lit according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring/presentation process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. It also monitors input as to whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S1808), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33, lighting patterns of the sub-LED 290, etc. are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the lamp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1809, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

After completing the process in S1810, a sub-liquid crystal drive process is executed to drive (slide drive, rotation drive, etc.) the sub-liquid crystal display device (sub-liquid crystal) 523 (S1811). Details of this sub-liquid crystal driving process (S1811) will be described later with reference to FIG. 108.

After the sub-liquid crystal driving process (S1811), a command determination process is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1812). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Next, the process moves to S1813. In the process of S1813, a variable display setting process is executed (S1813). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1814). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1816), and the power-off process is executed (S1817). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1818), and the process is then looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1815), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1815: No), the process returns to S1801 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the command determination process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1812). This command determination process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . In addition, in this process, when the number of reserved balls command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also decides to start a continuous preview performance.

In the command determination process (FIG. 102, S1812), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and sent to the main controller 110. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S1901). When a variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) to be described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1904). If the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1907). When the number of reserved pitches command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received number of reserved pitches command is the special number 1 reserved pitches command or the special number 2 reserved pitches command. , extracts the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of pending times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol), and extracts the value included in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times of reservation N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1908). In addition, in the process of S1908, a display pending ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b and the updated special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223c is set. After completing the process in S1908, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (starting winning), or when a special symbol lottery is held. Since the signal is sent from the main controller 110 when a starting prize is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the audio lamp control device 113 is sent by the process of S1908. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 may change from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol. Even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, when a starting prize is detected or when a special symbol is drawn, can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Note that when the process of S1908 is executed, a display number of reserved balls command is issued to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223b and the updated special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223c. Set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1907, if the held pitch count command has not been received (S1907: No), then it is determined whether a notification command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1909). If it is determined that a notification command has been received (S1909: Yes), the notification sound corresponding to the received command (in this control example, "look at the LCD") is selected, and a display command for notification is set. (S1910).

Next, in the process of S1909, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1909: No), then it is determined whether or not a jackpot related command has been received (S1911). In the process of S1911, if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S1911: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S1912), and the process moves to S1913. The details of the jackpot related process (S1912) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

On the other hand, in the process of S1911, if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received, the process directly proceeds to S1913.

In the process of S1913, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1913), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is transferred to the display control device 114. This is to set the command so that it will be sent to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot related process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing jackpot related processing (S1912). This jackpot-related process (S1912) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 1812) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

In the jackpot related process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2001). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S2002), and this process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received (S2003). In the process of S2003, if it is determined that a round number command has been received (S2003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S2004). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S2005), and the present process ends.

In the process of S2003, if it is determined that the number of rounds command has not been received (S2003: No), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings command has been received (S2006). In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the number of winnings command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the sub-number of winnings counter 223h is updated based on the received command, and the process proceeds to S2008.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the value of the sub winning prize counter 223h updated in the process of S2007 is greater than 10 (S2008). In the process of S2008, if the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h is larger than 10 (S2008: Yes), more game balls than the predetermined number of winnings (10) in one round have entered the specific winning hole 65a ( This is the so-called case of over-winning. In this case, over winning processing is executed (S2009) and the present processing ends. The details of the over winning process (S2009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 104.

On the other hand, in the process of S2008, if it is determined that the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h is 10 or less (S2008: No), in order to execute the normal winning effect, a normal effect command is set and the main effect is set. Finish the process.

In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the number of winnings command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2011).

In the process of S2011, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting process is executed (S2012), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S2013), and this process ends. do. Note that details of the ending setting process (S2012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

In the process of S2011, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2011: No), it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received (S2014).

In the process of S2014, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 and a performance suggesting that the probability change gaming state is given is executed. A display V effect command is set (S2015), and this processing is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the over winning process (S2009) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this over winning process (S2009). This over-winning process (S2009) is executed in the above-mentioned jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect based on an over-winning into the specific winning opening 65a.

In the over winning process, first, the value of the performance counter 223f is acquired (S2101). Then, it is determined whether there is any winning information in the winning information storage area 223a (S2103). If it is determined that there is winning information that results in a win (S2103: Yes), an over winning performance is selected from the over winning winning table 222b1 based on the value of the performance counter 223f acquired in the process of S2101 (S2103). , the process moves to step S2107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2103 that there is no winning information (S2103: No), then it is determined whether there is winning information that includes information for which the omen flag 203u is set to ON. (S2104). In the process of S2104, if it is determined that there is winning information that includes information in which the omen flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: Yes), from the omen excess winning table 222b2, an overage is determined based on the value of the performance counter 223f. A winning presentation is selected (S2105), and the process moves to S2107.

In the process of S2104, if it is determined that there is no winning information that includes the information for which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: No), from the over winning table 222b3, the over winning information is determined based on the value of the performance counter 223f. A winning presentation is selected (S2106), and the process moves to S2107.

In the process of S2107, a display over winning command indicating the over winning effect selected in the process of S2103, S2105 or S2106 is set (S2107), and the process moves to S2108.

In the process of S2108, it is determined whether the selected over winning effect is a "school of fish" (S2108). If it is determined that the selected over-winning presentation is a "school of fish" (S2108: Yes), the school of fish flag 223i is set to ON (S2109), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2108, if it is determined that the selected over winning effect is not a "school of fish" (S2108: No), then it is determined whether the selected over winning effect is a "bubbles". (S2110). If it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is a "bubble" (S2110), the bubble number counter 223j is incremented by 1 (S2111), and the process ends. In the process of S2111, the number of times "bubbles" is selected in over-winning is stored, and when selecting the ending effect, the selection ratio of the ending effect is changed according to the number of times "bubbles" is selected (Fig. 104).

In the process of S2110, if it is determined that the selected over winning effect is not a "bubble" (S2110: No), the process is directly ended.

In this way, the over winning effect that is displayed when over winning is different depending on whether or not there is information about a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not there will be a jackpot after that). It is configured as follows. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the over winning effect will be displayed, so that the player's interest can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the ending setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this ending setting process (S2012). This ending setting process (S2012) is a process executed in the above-mentioned jackpot related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing the performance at the end of the jackpot.

In the ending setting process, first, it is determined whether the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201). In the process of S2201, if it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), then in the over-winning presentation, a presentation suggesting that a variable probability game state will be given after that has already been executed (displayed). In this case, the continuous ending effect is selected (S2202), and the process moves to S2209. Thereby, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that effects suggesting that a variable probability gaming state will be given are repeatedly executed (displayed) and give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the process of S2201, if it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), then the value of the performance counter 223f is acquired (S2203). Then, it is determined whether winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204).

In the process of S2204, if it is determined that winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: Yes), an ending performance is selected from the winning ending table 222c1 based on the value of the performance counter 223f. (S2205), the process moves to S2209.

On the other hand, in the process of S2204, if it is determined that winning information is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: No), then winning information including information for which the omen flag 203u is set to ON is determined. It is determined whether or not there is (S2206).

In the process of S2206, if it is determined that there is winning information including information for which the omen flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: Yes), an effect is selected from the omen ending table 222c2, and the process moves to S2209. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S2206, if it is determined that there is no winning information including information for which the omen flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: No), a performance is selected from the losing ending table 222c3, and the process of S2209 is performed. Move to.

In the process of S2209, a production command indicating the production selected in the process of S2202, S2205, S2207, or S2208 is set (S2209), the fish school flag 223i is set to OFF (S2210), and the value of the bubble number counter 223j is set. It is set to 0 (S2211), and this processing ends.

In this way, the ending effect displayed at the end of the jackpot differs depending on whether there is information on the jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not there will be a jackpot after that). It is configured as follows. As a result, the player pays attention to the ending performance while playing the game, which can improve the player's interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the variable display setting process (S1813) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1813). This variable display setting process (S1813) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2301: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2306. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2302), and then, in the process of S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102), the fluctuation pattern is The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2303).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2304). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

After completing the process in S2304, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern acquired in the process in S2303 includes a driving scenario setting (S2305). In the process of S2305, if it is determined that there is a driving scenario setting (S2305: Yes), the corresponding driving scenario is stored from the sub-LCD driving scenario 222d to the driving scenario storage area 223n (S2306), and the driving scenario is set. The counter 223m is set to 0 (S2307), and the process moves to S2308.

In the process of S2308, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2308). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2308: No), this fluctuation display is because the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2308: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2309), and then, in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102), The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2310). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is directly set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 (S2311), and the process moves to S2312. In the process of S2312, a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S2312). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the lamp editing process (S1808) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this lamp editing process (S1808). This lamp editing process (S1808) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is performed at the same timing as the sub-symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 114. Executes settings such as lighting of sub-LEDs controlled by .

In the ramp editing process (FIG. 107, S1808), first, it is determined whether the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2401). If it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2401: No), the process from S2402 to S2406 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2407.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2401: Yes), the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S2402), and it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (S2403). .

In the process of S2403, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (S2403: No), the process of S2404 to S2406 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2407.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, if it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (S2403: Yes), the value of the clock counter to be turned on is determined based on the selected fluctuation time (S2404). Then, a counter command indicating the value of the clock counter determined in the process of S2404 is set (S2405), lighting data of the sub-LED is set based on the determined value of the clock counter (S2406), and the process moves to the process of S2407. do.

In the process of S2407, a process for lighting other lamps is executed, and this process ends.

Although the details will be described later, the audio lamp control device 113 and the sub display device 114 execute lighting of the sub LED and display of the sub symbol based on the value of the counter updated based on the same clock signal. I try to do that. Thereby, it is possible to control the sub-LED to light up at the same timing as the sub-symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the sub-liquid crystal drive process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this sub-liquid crystal driving process (S1811). This sub-liquid crystal drive process (S1811) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process that drives the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 (slide drive, This is a process for rotating (rotational drive, etc.).

In the sub liquid crystal drive process (FIG. 108, S1811), first, it is determined whether or not a drive scenario is stored in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2501). In the process of S2501, if it is determined that no drive scenario is stored, it is not the timing to drive the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, and the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that a driving scenario is stored (S2501: Yes), the driving scenario counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S2502).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is motor drive data corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m after addition in the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area (S2503). In the process of S2503, if it is determined that there is motor drive data (S2503: Yes), various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are driven based on the motor drive data. In order to do this, motor drive data is set based on the information in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2504), a drive data command is set (S2505), and this process ends.

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that there is no motor drive data (S2503), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506). Specifically, if the information in the drive scenario storage area corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is "END", it is determined that it is the end timing of the drive scenario.

In the process of S2506, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the driving scenario (S2506: Yes), the information in the driving scenario storage area 223n is cleared (S2507), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the drive scenario, the process ends immediately.

<About the control process executed by the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 126. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 109, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration, and , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2601), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S2601) will be explained with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2601) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2701). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S2702). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S2701.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S2702, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2702, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S2703). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2704), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) (S2705), the execution of the boot program is finished and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S2601), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 110, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S2701. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2702. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2701 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a portion of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S2701, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the steps S2702 and S2702 multiple times, the steps S2703 to S2705 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S2703 to S2705 without performing the processes of S2701 and S2702. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 109. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2603). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S2603, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2604). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S2604, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S2605). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 123(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S4602 in FIG. 123(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111(b)), the simple Command determination processing (see S2908 in FIG. 111(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2909 in FIG. 111(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first prize opening 64 (starting prize), and an instruction to start the variable performance is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation production period, and a simple variation production is performed. I can do it. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the processing in S2605, interrupt permission is set (S2606), and the start of clock output is set for the clock generation device 900 (S2607). As a result, clock output is started after the display control device 114 starts up. Since the audio lamp control device 113 starts up earlier than the display control device 114, the clock output starts after both the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 start up. can be accurately synchronized.

Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S2606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 111(a). FIG. 111(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2801), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 111(b). FIG. 111(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 111(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not the power-on image (not shown) but the normal production. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2903) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2902), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 to 90.

In the display setting process (S2903), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2902) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 93.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2904). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2903) or the simple display setting process (S2909). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

Next, a drawing correction process is executed to correct the drawing contents (S2906). Details of the drawing correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2907). In this drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S2904), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2905) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 59, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2908). The counter updated by the process of S2908 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (Jackpot A, Jackpot B, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss, chance) is detected. The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the second symbol are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

Then, it is determined whether the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2909). If it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2909: Yes), the display clock counter is incremented by 1 (S2910), and the V interrupt processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2909: No), the V interrupt processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901: Yes), this means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2911) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S2912) is executed, and the process in S2904 is executed. Move to processing.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2902), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 112, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3001), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3001: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2903) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S3002), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S3003).

First, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3005), and the process returns to S3001.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S3005) will be described with reference to FIG. 113(a). FIG. 113(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3101).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation time is actually longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set in the process of S3101 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S3103). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S3103, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can be judged.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3104), and the pointer is 233f is initialized to 0 (S3105). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3106), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3105, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data was set in the process of S3104 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 112. In the process of S3004, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3004: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3006), If there is a display variation type command (S3006: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S3007), and the process returns to S3001.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. 113(b). FIG. 113(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, reach other than front/back off, complete miss, or chance) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S3201), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111(b)) is executed, and displays the stop type on the third symbol display device. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S3202).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S3202 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S3203), this stop type command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbols (symbol offset information) set by the process of S3202 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2904), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S3202 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S3203, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Incidentally, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, but before drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transferred from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S3202.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 will display a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 112. In the process of S3006, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3006: No), then it is determined whether there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3008), and the jackpot is executed. If there is a related command, a display jackpot related command process is executed (S3009), and the process returns to S3001.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117, the above-mentioned display jackpot-related command process (S3009), which is a process of the command determination process (S2902, see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. I will explain the details. First, FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot related command processing.

In this display jackpot related command processing, as shown in FIG. S3301: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S3302), and the process moves to S3303.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 115(a). FIG. 115(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3405), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 114, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3301, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3303), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S3303: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S3304), and the process moves to S3305.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. 115(b). FIG. 115(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3502).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3501, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3505), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 114, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3303, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S3303: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3305), and the display command is executed. If there is an ending command (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process moves to S3307.

Here, details of the ending command processing (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. 116(a). FIG. 116(a) is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3601). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3602).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3601, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3603). S3604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 114. In the process of S3305, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S3305: No), then it is determined whether there is a normal winning effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3307), If there is a normal winning effect command for display (S3307: Yes), normal winning effect command processing is executed (S3308), and the process moves to S3309.

Here, the details of the normal winning effect command processing (S3308) will be explained with reference to FIG. 116(b). FIG. 116(b) is a flowchart showing normal winning effect command processing. This normal winning effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the normal winning effect command for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the normal winning effect command processing, first, a normal winning display data table corresponding to the display mode of the normal winning effect indicated by the display normal winning effect command is determined, and the determined normal winning display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. , and set it in the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3702).

Next, based on the normal winning display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3701, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3705), the normal winning command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 114. In the process of S3307, if it is determined that there is no normal winning effect command for display (S3307: No), then it is determined whether there is an over winning effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3309). ), if there is an over winning presentation command for display (S3309: Yes), normal over winning presentation command processing is executed (S3310) and the process moves to S3311.

Here, details of the over winning effect command processing (S3310) will be explained with reference to FIG. 117(a). FIG. 117(a) is a flowchart showing over winning effect command processing. This over winning effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display over winning effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the over winning performance command processing, first, an over winning performance display data table corresponding to the display mode of the over winning performance indicated by the over winning performance command for display is determined, and the determined over winning performance display data table is stored in a data table. It is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3802).

Next, based on the over winning performance display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the over winning effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 114. In the process of S3309, if it is determined that there is no over winning effect command for display (S3309: No), then it is determined whether there is a V effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3311). If there is a display V effect command (S3311: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S3312), and the display jackpot related command process is ended.

Here, details of the V effect command processing (S3312) will be explained with reference to FIG. 117(b). FIG. 117(b) is a flowchart showing V effect command processing. This V effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3902).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the V effect command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 114. In the process of S3311, if it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S3311: No), the display jackpot related command process is immediately terminated.

Returning to FIG. 112, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3008, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S3008: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3010), and the back image change command is If there is one (S3010: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S3009) will be described with reference to FIG. 118(a). FIG. 118(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag is set to on (S4001), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S4603) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S4002), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S4001 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S4002. . When the identified back image type is back B or back C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of back images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C should be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image determination flag set in S4002 determines whether The type of back image to be displayed at a time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 112. In the process of S3010, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S3010: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3010), and if there is an error command, it is determined. If (S3010: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

Here, details of the error command processing (S3011) will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). FIG. 118(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S4101, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S4102, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 112. In the process of S3012, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a counter command among the unprocessed commands (S3014).

In the process of S3014, if it is determined that there is a counter command (S3014: Yes), the lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the received command (S3015), and the process returns to S3001. The counter command notifies the display control device 114 of the timing to turn on the sub-LED 290 in the audio lamp control device 113. The lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the notified timing of lighting the sub-LED 290. Based on the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 223n and the display clock counter 223m, a sub-symbol is set in a sub-symbol setting process (see FIG. 122) to be described later. As a result, the sub-symbol is controlled to be displayed at the same timing as the sub-LED 290 is lit in the audio lamp control device 113 based on the display clock counter 223m, which is a counter synchronized with the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the lighting of the sub-LED 290 and the display of the sub-symbol can be performed in synchronization.

In the process of S3014, if it is determined that there is no counter command (S3014: No), then it is determined whether there is a drive data command (S3016), and if there is a drive data command (S3016: Yes), the reception The drive data storage area 223p is updated based on the command (S3017), and the process moves to S3001.

Through the process of S3017, display contents (for example, display angle, etc.) can be changed according to the updated information driven by the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, so that suitable effects can be executed.

In the process of S3016, if it is determined that there is no drive data command (S3016: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3018), and the process returns to S3001.

In the process of S3001, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes). ), the processes of S3002 to S3013 and S3019 are executed again. Then, the processes of S3001 to S3013 and S3019 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3001 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this Command determination processing ends.

Note that the simple command determination process (S2911) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the power-on image (not shown) are selected from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display variation pattern command. Only the stop type commands are extracted and the processing corresponding to each command, such as the variable pattern command process (see Figure 113(a)) and the stop type command process (see Figure 113(b)), is executed, and other processes are executed. Regarding the command, the process is performed to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 113(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S3101, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3102, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2903), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be explained with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 112, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S4201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S4201: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, so the process skips steps S4202 to S4204 and moves to the process S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S4202), S4203 to S4204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S4203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4301).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, information necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 119. After the warning image setting process (S4204) or in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4203: No), then the process moves to S4205.

In S4205, pointer update processing is executed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be explained with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f through the process of S4401, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S4402). As a result, if it is End information (S4402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data table is Time data corresponding to the production time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4405), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S4406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4402: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 119, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In task processing, the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S4206, along with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, rotation angle, etc.

Next, in order to set the display of the sub-symbols, a sub-symbol setting process is executed (S4207). Here, details of the sub-symbol setting process (S4207) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122. This sub-symbol setting process is a process for displaying sub-symbols on the third pattern display device 81 or the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in synchronization with the sub-LED 290 that is controlled to be lit in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the sub-symbol setting process (S4207), first, it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation period (S4501). In the process of S4501, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation period (S4501: No), it is not the timing to display the sub-symbols that are displayed in response to the fluctuation, so the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the fluctuation period (S4501), then it is determined whether the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502). Specifically, out of the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 233n, it is determined whether the information corresponding to the value of the display clock counter 233m is lighting information.

In the process of S4502, if it is determined that the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502: Yes), the drawing content obtained in the process of S4206 of the display setting process (see FIG. 119) is Among them, the information of the sub-symbol is set (changed) to be lit, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if it is determined that the value of the display clock counter 233m is not the value of the lighting timing (S4502: No), the drawing content acquired in the process of S4206 of the display setting process (see FIG. 119) Of these, the information of the sub-symbols is set (changed) to off, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 119, the explanation will be continued. When the process of S4207 is finished, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4208), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4209). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4209: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4209: Yes), it means that the presentation time of the presentation corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S4210).

As a result, if the final display flag 233z is off (S4210: Yes), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. (S4311), and then clears the contents by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4212). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4213), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4214). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag 233z, which indicates that the fixed display performance is in progress in the on state, to ON (S4215), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4216), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S4216 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S2904), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S4216, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S4210, if the confirmed display flag 233z is not on but off (S4210: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S4217). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S4217: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so the demo display data table is changed to the display data. The data is set in the table buffer 233d (S4218), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S4219). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4220). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4221), and the demo display flag 233y, which indicates that a demonstration is being produced in the on state, is set to on (S4222), this process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S4217, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S4217: Yes), it means that the demo effect will be performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so continue with the display setting process. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2912) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the variation effect using the power-on variation image has ended, for a predetermined period of time, the power-on variation image (Fig. A process is performed in which a display data table that specifies that the image (not shown) is to be stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. First, FIG. 123(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 123(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S4701), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S4701: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S4702). In the process of S4702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the transfer process has not finished (S4702: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4702: Yes), the process moves to S4703. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S4701, if the transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

In the process of S4703, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4703), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S4703: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S4703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 119 to 93) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) (see S4601: No in FIG. 123(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed with . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the normal image transfer setting process (S4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4205) of the previously executed display setting process (S2903) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4803), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

Further, in the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4802: No), the process of S4803 and S4804 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S4806).

In the process of S4806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S4806 that the transfer process has not finished (S4806: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4806: Yes), the process moves to S4807. Also, as a result of the process in S4805, if no image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4807.

In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807). If the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S4803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S4809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S4809: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S4810), the back image provided for each back image type is Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S4811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally (S4812), and proceeds to the process of S4813.

Note that if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S4813, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back side A, the normal image transfer process is immediately ended.

In the process of S4813, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S4813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S4813, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S4814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image will be changed. Among the image data used in the video RAM 235, image data that is not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this control example, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, details of the above-mentioned drawing correction process (S2906), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this drawing correction process. The drawing correction process (S2906) is a process for correcting the effect to be displayed in response to the driving of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523.

In the drawing correction process, first, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is being driven (S4901). In the process of S4901, if it is determined that the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is not being driven (S4901: No), there is no need to correct the drawing content, and the process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is being driven (S4901: Yes), the process moves to the process of S4902 to perform correction according to the driving state.

In the process of S4902, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is being slid (S4902). In the process of S4902, if it is determined that the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly driven (S4902: Yes), the display coordinates of symbols 1 to 3 are corrected according to the amount of sliding movement. (S4903), the process moves to S4904. In the process of S4903, by correcting the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3, an effect is executed (display) in which the display positions of the symbols 1 to 3 are integrally changed in response to the drive of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. It is possible to improve the player's interest.

In the process of S4902, if it is determined that the slide is not being driven (S4902: No), the process of S4903 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4904.

In the process of S4904, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904). In the process of S4904, if it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904: Yes), the display coordinates (and display angles) of all images are ) is corrected (S4905), and the process ends.

Through the process of S4905, the display coordinates (and display angle) of the image can be corrected according to the amount of rotation of the sub-LCD display device 523, so even when the sub-LCD display device 523 is rotated, a suitable effect can be displayed. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2907), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2904) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2905), a drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S4301). That is, in the process of S4301, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2904), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. , the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. Furthermore, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S2905), the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is included as the drawing target buffer information, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1; includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. I can do it.

In the drawing process, after the process in S4302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 111(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

As described above, in the first control example, when the game ball over-wins into the specific winning hole 65a, the over-winning effect is displayed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that he or she has won an excessive amount of money during a jackpot game, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, as an over-winning effect, information indicating the number of game balls that have over-winning may be displayed. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily grasp the number of game balls that have won over. Furthermore, the performance may be varied depending on the number of game balls that have won over. This makes it possible for the player to pay attention to the number of game balls that have won an excessive amount of winnings, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the first control example, as the over winning effect, the over winning effect indicating that the expectation level is high is likely to be displayed as the round in the jackpot game progresses. That is, the selection ratio of the over-winning effect is configured to be different depending on the number of rounds in the jackpot game. Thereby, even if the jackpot game lasts for a long time, the player's interest can be improved.

In the first control example, character strings indicating right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting, right-handed hitting, right-handed hitting) are arranged and displayed in a circumferential manner. Thereby, even if the display screen (sub-liquid crystal display device 523 or third symbol display device 81) rotates, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the player is in a right-handed game state.

Note that in addition to displaying a display suggesting that the player is playing right-handed, a voice suggesting that player is hitting right-handed (for example, a voice saying "Please play right-handed") may be output. Thereby, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is a right-handed game.

In the first control example, a sub LED 290 is provided on a decorative surface 523b which is the back side of a display surface 523a of a sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LED is made to blink in synchronization with the blinking display of a sub pattern displayed on the display surface 523a. It was configured as follows.

As a result, even if the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 performs a reversal operation and the display surface 523a of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 becomes invisible, the blinking display state of the sub-symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub-LED. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In the first control example, symbols are displayed across the upper display surface 523a and lower display surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. The display position of the symbol is configured to be changed in accordance with the displacement. Thereby, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used to perform the performance, and the player's interest can be improved. Moreover, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 becomes invisible by the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, effects can be suitably displayed.

In the first control example, the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (slide) up and down (that is, when the display area is vertically long), and when they are driven (slide) left and right. ) (that is, when the display area is horizontally long), the display angle and display coordinates of the image data are corrected. Thereby, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used to perform the performance, and the player's interest can be improved.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a tenth embodiment with reference to FIGS. 127 to 137. In the first control example described above, a game machine that displays an effect when a game ball over-wins into the specific winning hole 65a has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, game balls that have won an excessive amount of money during a jackpot game are stored in an area that is visible to the player, and the ending performance of the jackpot game is adjusted according to the number of stored game balls. It was configured so that the content of the performance could be varied. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in the first control example described above, by displaying the character strings suggesting right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting, right-handed hitting, right-handed hitting) arranged in a circumferential manner, the display screen (sub liquid crystal display device 523 or third symbol display device A gaming machine has been described which can suitably suggest that the player is in a right-handed playing state even when the player 81) rotates.

In contrast, in this control example, direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j for indicating the gaming state (the direction in which the game ball is fired) are arranged in a circumferential manner on the decorative surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523. The lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged in a shape (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) is configured to indicate the gaming state. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed in reverse, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged circumferentially.

This second control example differs from the first control example in that the variable winning device 65 is changed to store over-winning game balls in an area that is visible to the player, and the variable winning device 65 A distributing member 65c for distributing winning game balls to determine whether to store them or not and a distributing motor 65c2 for driving the distributing member are provided, and the game state is displayed on the decorative surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523. The difference is that direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j for indicating the direction in which the game ball is to be launched are arranged in a circumferential manner. In addition, the content of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control processing 113 have been partially changed. The difference is that The other points are the same as the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 127, this control example is different from the first control example described above in that the inside of the variable prize winning device 65 has been changed, and the other points are the same.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, the variable prize winning device 65 in this control example, like the first control example, opens and closes the opening/closing door 65f1 a predetermined number of times (e.g. , 15 times (rounds)). In each round, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until a predetermined number of balls (10) have been won).

In each round, winning game balls up to a predetermined number flow down the normal winning channel 65e1 in the variable winning device 65 and are discharged. On the other hand, game balls that have won in excess of a predetermined number (so-called over-win game balls) are configured to flow down an over-win flow path 65e2 in the variable winning device 65.

On the left side of the opening/closing door 65f1, a performance section is formed for performing a performance with a game ball after winning a prize in the variable winning device 65. The details of this production section will be explained with reference to FIG. 128, but game balls that have won more than 10 in each round game (hereinafter referred to as over-wins) are distributed by the distribution member 65c (see FIG. 128). , and an effect as to whether or not to be guided to the storage channel 65e4 is executed. In this control example, if four or more balls are stored in the storage channel 65e4 in each round, it is indicated that a winning ball is stored among the held balls. As shown in FIG. 127, the distribution member 65c and the storage channel 65e4 are placed in a position that is visible to the player, so if you win an excessive amount during a jackpot game, more prize balls than usual will be paid out. In addition to the feeling of anticipation, the user can enjoy the performance of whether or not the game ball that has won an over-win will be guided to the storage channel 65e4. Therefore, the player's interest can be further improved.

Next, details of the variable prize winning device 65 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128(a) is a rear view of the variable prize winning device 65 immediately after the start of each round. The specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 has a vertically long opening configured with a height that allows one game ball to pass through, and allows the game ball that enters the opening to be directed to the back side of the game board 13. A taxiway has been formed to guide the passengers. A guide hole for guiding the game ball to a guide path for making the game ball flow downstream is formed inside the specific winning hole 65a, and the guiding hole and the over winning flow path 65e3 described later or the normal winning hole are formed inside the specific winning hole 65a. It is formed in communication with the flow path 65e1. A detection switch 65a1 is attached to the guide hole, and a game ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a is detected.

A winning channel switching member 65b is arranged between the normal winning channel 65e1 and the over winning channel 65e3, and is configured to distribute game balls to the normal winning channel 65e1 and the over winning channel 65e3. has been done. The winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward to have its tip directed in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 128(b)) and downwardly to have its tip directed downward by an over-winning solenoid (not shown). (see FIG. 128(a)). When the over winning solenoid is turned on, the winning flow path switching member 65b rotates upward (see FIG. 128(b)), and when the over winning solenoid is turned off, the winning flow path switching member 65b rotates downward. It is configured to rotate (see FIG. 128(a)).

The normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path that allows the game ball to flow vertically downward when the winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated downward (see FIG. 128(a)), and is a flow path for discharging the game ball. It is configured to communicate with the discharge flow path 65e2. A discharge switch 65a3 for detecting a game ball flowing down is arranged in the discharge channel 65e2. This normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path through which game balls until 10 balls win in each round flow down, and the game balls that flowed down pass through a discharge flow path 65e2, and then pass through a flow path in which a probability change switch 65a5 is arranged. After being guided to the gaming machine, it is ejected to the outside of the gaming machine. The game ball after being detected by the detection switch 65a1 is treated as an out ball in the same way as the game ball after entering the out port. By being treated as an out ball, it is also possible to store game balls and use them for performances.

The over winning channel 65e3 is a channel that allows the game ball to flow down to the left when the winning channel switching member 65b is rotated upward and communicates with the over winning channel 65e3 (see FIG. 128(b)). It is. The over winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path through which over winning game balls that have won more than 10 balls in each round flow down. At the end of the over winning flow path 65e3, an over winning detection switch 65a2 (photo sensor) for detecting passage of an over winning game ball is arranged. A distributing member 65c for distributing over-winning game balls to a storage channel 65e4 and a discharge channel 65e2 is arranged downstream of the over-winning channel 65e3.

The distribution member 65c has a disk-shaped outer shape, and has a thickness (15 mm) slightly larger than that of one game ball. A shaft portion is formed at the center of the distribution member 65c and is formed to protrude toward the back side, and is configured to be rotatable left and right by a stepping motor. The distribution member 65c has a concave portion that can accommodate one game ball as a storage area 65c1. This storage area 65c1 has an opening formed on the side surface of the distribution member 65c, and is configured to allow game balls flowing down from the over-winning channel 65e3 to enter the storage area 65c1. The storage area 65c1 is configured so that when a game ball enters, the entire game ball is accommodated within the storage area 65c1, and even when the distribution member 65c rotates, the rotation is not hindered. has been done. The distribution member 65c always distributes the storage area 65c1 in the upper right 45 degree direction, which is the position where the leader area 65c1 can receive the game balls flowing down from the over winning channel 65e3 (see FIG. 128(a)). It is stopped with the opening facing, and rotates to either the left or right direction with the game ball stored in the storage area 65c1 two seconds after the game ball is detected by the over winning detection switch 65a2. It is configured. The direction in which the ball is rotated is determined based on the determination result of the held ball stored in the held ball. The details will be described later, but if the reserved ball that will win the jackpot is stored, a lottery will be held with a probability of 1/2 every time a game ball that wins an over-win occurs, and if you win the lottery, the lottery will be held. The dividing member 65c rotates to the left, and the game ball stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided into the storage channel 65e4. The upper limit is 6 balls, and when 6 balls are stored in the storage area 65i, the distribution member 65c rotates to the right with the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1. Then, the stored game balls are caused to flow down into the discharge channel 65e2. In addition, if the lottery with the above-mentioned 1/2 probability is unsuccessful, the distribution member 65c rotates to the right, and the game balls in the storage area 65c1 are guided (distributed) to the discharge channel 65e2. be done.

If there is no stored ball that will become a jackpot in the held balls in the hold (if a held ball that will become a jackpot if it passes the probability change switch 65a5 is stored (including before passing the probability change switch 65a5) , the sorting member 65c rotates to the left and right to distribute the balls that are randomly drawn with a probability of 1/3 and are a jackpot as described above. If reserved balls are stored that will result in a jackpot if they pass through the switch 65a5, up to four overly winning balls will be guided to the storage area 65i, and any more game balls will be sent to the right by the distribution member 65c. The game ball rotated in the direction and stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the discharge flow path 65e2.

As already explained, the storage channel 65e4 has a storage area 65i at its terminal end that can store up to 6 over-winning balls. The storage area 65i has a height that can store two stacked game balls, and is formed with a depth (15 mm) slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls. The bottom surface of the storage area 65i is gently inclined to the right, and a storage switching member 65g for discharging the game balls in the storage area 65i is attached to the downstream end. In this storage switching member 65g, a shaft portion 65g1 formed at one end is rotatably fixed to the upper wall portion of the storage area 65i, and is rotated upward by a solenoid (not shown) (FIG. 128(b) )) and a downwardly rotated state with the tip facing vertically downward. In this control example, at the start of the jackpot game, it is rotated downward, and based on the ending start timing, which is the end timing of the jackpot game, it is rotated upward (rotated to the upper right) and the storage area is rotated downward. It is configured so that the game balls in 65i are discharged to the storage discharge channel 65e6. A storage and discharge switch 65a4 (photo sensor, etc.) capable of detecting game balls discharged from the storage region 65i is arranged at the upstream portion (entrance portion) of the storage and discharge flow path 65e6. In addition, the game balls discharged from the storage area 65i are configured not to be guided to the probability change switch 65a5.

Although not shown, a switching member 65h and a variable rate switch 65a5, which are variable by the variable rate solenoid 65k, are provided at the downstream end of the discharge flow path 65e2. When the variable probability solenoid 65k is on, the game ball that has flown down can pass through the variable variable switch 65a5, and when the variable variable solenoid 65k is off, the game ball that has flown down is unable (or difficult) to pass through the variable variable switch 65a5. It is configured to be.

In this way, in the variable winning device 65 in this control example, the winning flow path switching member 65b is configured so that the game ball passes through the normal winning flow path 65e1 until the number of entered balls determined in each round is 10. is controlled. Therefore, the flow path between the game ball that has won an overwin and the game ball that has not won an overwin can be separated, and the game ball that has won an overwin can be accurately detected.

In addition, in this control example, the game board 13 is hollowed out in the front of the production section (the distribution member 65c, the storage channel 65e4, and the storage area 65i), and is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine 10. There is.

In this way, in this control example, when an over-win occurs in each round, the distribution member 65c rotates to perform an effect as to whether or not the game ball is guided to the storage area 65i. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the player has won an excessive amount of money. The player can visually confirm that the game ball has entered the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c, confirm whether the game ball has won an over-win, and enjoy the effect of whether the distribution member 65c rotates in the left or right direction. can. Based on the number of game balls guided to the storage area 65i during the jackpot game, it is also possible to predict the result of determination of the validity of the reserved balls stored in the reserved ball. In this control example, when a reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is stored in the reserved balls, the game ball is guided to the storage area 65i with a high probability, so the distribution member 65c It is also possible to predict the determination result for reserved balls based on the frequency with which they are distributed. Therefore, by distributing the game balls to the storage area 65i, the player can remember that the reserved balls that will become jackpots are stored in the reserved balls, and even after this jackpot game, jackpots will be executed continuously in a short period of time. You can have expectations for. Furthermore, in this control example, since the maximum number of game balls to be guided to the storage area 65i is variably set based on the judgment result stored in the hold, the correctness judgment result can be quickly determined based on the number of balls guided. can be predicted. Furthermore, when 5 or more balls are stored in the storage area 65i, it can be recognized that the held balls that will become a jackpot are stored in the held state, and the determination result is notified to the player at an early stage to increase the player's interest. can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, it was configured to notify that there are stored reserved balls that will be a jackpot when 5 balls or more are received, but the number etc. may be set as appropriate. Further, the lottery probability for determining whether or not to allocate to the storage area 65i by the allocating member 65c may be set as appropriate. Furthermore, the lottery probability of distribution may be changed depending on the history of the occurrence rate of over winnings (in the previous jackpot game). Further, the maximum number of balls guided to the storage area 65i based on the determination result may be changed depending on the occurrence rate of over winnings (in the previous jackpot game). In this case, at the start of a jackpot game or during a jackpot game, text or voice guidance such as "If 3 game balls are accumulated in the storage area 65i, the reservation is confirmed!!" may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, although the distribution member 65c is configured to distribute the game balls by rotating, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured to distribute the game balls in a seesaw shape. In addition, all over-winning balls are guided to the storage area 65i, and the number of over-winning balls stored is used to notify the judgment result of the reserved balls, and to promote promotion during jackpot games from normal symbols to variable symbols. You may. In this case, it is conceivable to create an effect such that promotion chances are given as many times as the number of over-winning balls during the jackpot game.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

In this second control example, the distribution motor 65c2 is provided, the direction notification LED 295 is provided, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example described above. The difference is that the Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The distribution motor 65c2 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is driven and controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Specifically, when a jackpot game is started, driving of the distribution motor 65c2 is started, and the distribution member 65c is rotationally driven. As described above, the sorting motor 65c2 is driven alternately counterclockwise and clockwise at regular intervals (2 second intervals), and the storage area 65c1 of the sorting member 65c flows down the over winning channel 65e3. A position rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise around the position where game balls can be received (a position where game balls in the storage area 65c1 flow down to the storage channel 65e4) and a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise ( The game balls in the storage area 65c1 are alternately moved to a position where they flow down to the out flow path 65e5 (see FIG. 128).

The direction notification LED 295 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp output device 113 and is controlled to turn on based on a command sent from the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The direction notification LEDs 295 are arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, and a total of 10 LEDs are provided, 5 on the upper decorative surface 523b1 (295f to 295j) and 5 on the lower decorative surface 523b2 (295a to 295e). (See Figure 132). As described above, when the game state is a game state in which the player plays right-handed, the lighting/extinguishing of the direction notification LED 295 is controlled so that the lighting order is clockwise (clockwise), suggesting that the player plays right-handed. (notification) and when the game state is a game state in which left-handed hitting is required, the direction LED 295 is controlled to turn on and off so that the lighting order is counterclockwise (counterclockwise), suggesting that left-handed hitting is to be performed. (notification) to be made.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 130(a). FIG. 130(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this RAM 203. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second control example differs from the RAM 203 in the first control example in that a storage number counter 203v and a storage upper limit number 203w are added. Since the other points are the same as the first control example, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The storage number counter 203v is a counter for counting the number of game balls distributed to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c among the over-winning game balls. The value of this storage number counter 203v is incremented by 1 when the distribution motor is set to be driven with the storage channel 65e4 as the distribution destination in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133). 5111). Then, in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), when the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4, it is determined whether game balls exceeding the storage upper limit number will be distributed to the storage area. Referenced for. Although not shown, the value of the stored number counter 203v is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

The storage upper limit number 203w is a value for determining the upper limit of the number of game balls that are distributed to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c among the over-winning game balls. The value of the storage upper limit number 203w is set in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 134) according to the pending winning information (that is, according to the expectation of a jackpot after that) (see FIG. 134). (See S5103, S5105, S5106). Then, when the value of the storage number counter 203v described above is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w, it is allowed that the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4. Although not shown, the value of the storage upper limit number 203w is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 130(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this RAM 223. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example has a specific winning opening state 223p and a storage number counter 223r added to the RAM 223 in the first control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning hole state 223p stores information indicating whether or not a game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, indicating that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the specific When the winning opening state 223p is in a closed state, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in a closed state, and it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. shows. The specific winning hole state 223p is set to the open state when a round number command indicating the start of a round in the jackpot game (that is, opening of the specific winning hole 65a) is received from the main control device 110 (see S2031 in FIG. 136). , the closed state is set when a closing command based on closing the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is received (see S2034 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning a prize opening state 223p is referred to when a winning number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S2032 in FIG. 136), and whether the received winning number command is a command based on normal winnings, or , it is determined whether the command is based on over winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect which is an integrated effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described. FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect executed in this control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 131(a), a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven up and down will be described.

As shown in FIG. 131(a), in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, as the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven up and down, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the 3. The display contents displayed on the symbol display device 81 are changed.

Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area that is the sum of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 An image of a star is displayed in the section.

After that, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven upward, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven downward, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 becomes visible in the center. In response to this drive, the star image displayed in the center is duplicated and moved in four directions: upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. The star image that is moved to the upper right and the upper left is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1, which are now visible, and is displayed after being moved to the lower right and the lower left. The image of the star is displayed across the third symbol display device 81, which is now visible, and the lower display surface 523a2.

Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is further driven upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the star image that is moved to the upper right and upper left and displayed is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, The star images that are moved to the lower right and lower left are displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

In this way, in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, as the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven up and down, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 Together, the star images are moved in four directions: upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. As a result, in addition to driving the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 up and down, it is possible to display effects corresponding to the driving, thereby increasing the player's interest. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 131(b), a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect will be described when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right. .

The liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the above-mentioned upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. , the same image data is used, and the rotation angle and position of the image data are corrected to execute the effect. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of image data used for liquid crystal drive interlocking effects.

Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area that is the sum of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 An image of a star is displayed in the section.

The star image displayed in the center is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) and displayed, compared to the above-described case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. Thereby, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data even when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (left).

Thereafter, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven to the left, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven to the right, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 becomes visible in the center. In response to this drive, the star image displayed in the center is duplicated and moved in four directions: upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. The star image that is moved to the upper left and lower left is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1, which are now visible, and is displayed after being moved to the upper right and lower right. The image of the star is displayed across the third symbol display device 81, which is now visible, and the lower display surface 523a2.

The star image that is displayed by being moved in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left is moved counterclockwise ( (counterclockwise) rotated 90 degrees and displayed. In addition, the display positions are corrected and displayed. Specifically, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically, but when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven horizontally, the display area is vertically elongated. The display area changes to a horizontal display area. Therefore, the display position of each star pattern is corrected so that the amount of movement in the vertical direction is small and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction is large. Thereby, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data even when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (left).

Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is further driven upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the rotation angle and display position of each star image are corrected and moved to the upper left and lower left. The displayed star image is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the star image that is moved to the upper right and lower right and displayed is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

In this way, in this control example, the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect is performed when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the above-mentioned upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically. In the case of liquid crystal drive interlocking effects, the same image data is used, and the effects are executed by correcting the rotation angle and display position of the image data. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of image data used for liquid crystal drive interlocking effects.

Note that in this control example, the display position of the image data is configured to be corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically (that is, when the display area is vertically long), the image data is compressed (reduced) to be vertically long and displayed. When the display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right (that is, when the display area is horizontally long), it is also possible to compress (reduce) the image data so that it becomes horizontally long.

In addition, if either one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven due to a failure or the like and the display area cannot be expanded, the display position of the image data is corrected according to the display area. Alternatively, the image data may be compressed (reduced). Thereby, even if either one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven and the display area cannot be expanded, effects can be suitably displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a description will be given of the gaming method suggestion effect executed (notified) by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the game method suggestion performance.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), the decorative surface 523 of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example is decorated in the shape of an apple, and the left half of the upper decorative surface 523b1 is decorated with an apple. , the remaining right half of the lower decorative surface 523b2 is decorated. Therefore, by driving the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 to adjacent positions, an integrated effect can be performed.

Direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are circumferentially arranged on the round apple fruit part of the decoration on the decorative surface 523. Specifically, the direction notification LED 295a is placed at the top of the right half, and each direction notification LED 295 is placed in clockwise order from there (in the order of direction notification LEDs 295b, 295c...295j), A direction notification LED 295j is arranged at the top of the left half.

These direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are controlled to light up by setting a right-handed notification command or a left-handed notification command according to the current gaming state by the gaming method notification process of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later.

When a right-handed notification command indicating that the current gaming state is a right-handed game state is set, the direction notification LED 295a is first turned on and off, then the direction notification LED 295b is turned on and off, In this way, each direction notification LED 295 is turned on and off in clockwise order. As a result, the circumferentially arranged direction notification LEDs 295 turn on and off in a clockwise (clockwise) direction, indicating to the player that they are currently in a right-handed game state ( notification).

On the other hand, when a left-handed notification command indicating that the current gaming state is a left-handed game state is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on and off, and then the direction notification LED 295j is turned on and off. , the respective direction notification LEDs 295 are turned on and off in counterclockwise order. As a result, the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in a circumferential manner turn on and off in a counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction, indicating to the player that they are currently in a gaming state in which they are playing left-handed. (notification) can be made.

FIG. 132(b) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise with respect to FIG. 132(a). Also in this case, when the right-hand hitting notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on and off in a clockwise (clockwise) direction starting from the direction notification LED 295a. Further, when the left-handed hitting notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on and off in a counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction starting from the direction notification LED 295a.

In this way, in this control example, regardless of the state in which the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, by executing the same control process, it is possible to determine whether the game is in a right-handed (or left-handed) game state. Can be suggested (notified). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) control processing from becoming complicated.

<About the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 133. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that the jackpot control process (S1004) has been partially changed, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004) in this control example. This jackpot control process (S1004) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU of the main control device 110.

In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101).

Then, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON (S1131), and this process ends. do.

Furthermore, by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to ON through the process of S1131, it becomes possible to store the game balls that have entered the storage area 65i. This storage area 65i is an area where over-winning game balls are flowed down, and the content of the ending performance is configured to vary depending on the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game. . The game balls stored in the storage area 65i are flown down to the storage discharge channel 65e6 by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to OFF at the end of the jackpot (before the start of the ending effect).

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing (S1101: No), then it is determined whether or not a jackpot is occurring (S1103). In the process of S1103, if it is determined that there is no jackpot (S1103: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1103: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

In the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to OFF (S1132), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1134), This process ends.

By the process of S1132, the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to OFF, so that the game ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a and passes the detection switch 65a1 can flow down to the normal winning channel 65e1. Details will be described later, but in the same round, when a predetermined number of game balls (10 in this control example) pass through the detection switch 65a1, the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON, and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. The game ball that has passed through the detection switch 65a1 cannot flow down to the normal winning channel 65e1, but flows down to the over winning channel 65e2.

In the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133). If it is determined in the process of S1133 that it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133: Yes), the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON (S1134), the opening solenoid is set to OFF (S1135), and a closing command is set. (S1136), and this process ends.

By setting the over winning solenoid 65b1 to ON by the process of S1134, the game ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a and passes through the detection switch 65a1 becomes unable to flow down to the normal winning channel 65e1, and the over winning solenoid 65b1 is turned on. It becomes possible to flow down to the prize winning channel 65e2. The game balls that have flowed down to the over winning channel 65e2 flow down to the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c, and are distributed to the storage channel 65e4 or the out channel 65e5.

By the process of S1135, the opening solenoid is set to OFF, and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is in a closed state.

Through the process of S1136, the audio lamp control device 113 is notified that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is in the closed state. By being notified of this closing command, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine that the subsequently notified number of balls entered command is a number of balls entered command based on over-winning.

In the process of S1133, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the closing operation (S1133: No), it is determined whether it is the timing for operating the variable probability solenoid 65k (S1106). In the process of S1106, if it is determined that it is the operating timing of the variable rate solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the variable rate solenoid 65k is set to ON, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1133, if it is determined that it is not the operating timing of the variable solenoid 65k (S1106: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the storage and discharge timing (S1137), and it is determined that it is the storage and discharge timing. If so (S1137: Yes), the storage solenoid is set to OFF (S1138), and this process ends.

In the process of S1137, if the timing is predetermined as a jackpot game (in this control example, 5 seconds before the start timing of the ending performance), it is determined that it is the storage and discharge timing. Thereby, the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i can be counted by the storage discharge switch 65a4 before starting the ending performance, and the ending performance can be displayed according to the count result.

Note that the storage and discharge timing is not limited to that described above. For example, it may be ejected every round and counted, or it may be ejected at the timing when an ending command is received.

In the process of S1137, if it is determined that it is not the storage/discharge timing (S1137: No), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the storage/discharge switch 65a4 (S1139), and the storage/discharge switch 65a4 is activated. If it is determined that has passed (S1139: Yes), a storage and discharge command is set (S1140), and this process ends.

Through the process of S1140, the storage discharge command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, so the voice lamp control device 113 can count the number of game balls stored during the jackpot game, and depending on the count result, The ending effect can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1139, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the storage switch 65a4 (1139: No), the process moves to S1108.

In the process of S1108, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the processes of S1109 and S1110 are executed, and the present process ends, similarly to the first control example.

On the other hand, in the process of S1108, if it is determined that it is not the start time of the ending effect (S1108: No), the distribution motor setting process is executed (S1141), and other processes (notification process (S1111), winning process (S1112) and abnormality processing (S1113)), and this processing ends.

Here, details of the distribution motor setting process (S1141) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 134. The distribution motor setting process (S1141) determines whether to drive the distribution motor 65c2 so as to distribute the game balls that have passed the over winning switch 65a2 to either the storage channel 65e4 or the out channel 65e5, This is a process for setting.

In the distribution motor setting process (S1141), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101).

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101: No), there is no need to drive the sorting motor to sort the game balls, so this process is continued. finish. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution motor may of course be driven at all times.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the game ball has passed the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101: Yes), then it is determined whether there is winning information that will result in a jackpot among the pending winning information. (S5102).

In the process of S5102, if it is determined that there is winning information that will become a jackpot among the winning information that has been put on hold (S5102: Yes), this means that it is certain that a jackpot will occur after that, so the storage upper limit number 203w is set to 4, and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that there is no jackpot winning information among the pending winning information (S5102: No), then it is determined whether or not the omen flag 203u is on (S5103). ).

In the process of S5103, if it is determined that the sign flag 203u is on (S5103), although it is not certain that there will be a jackpot after that, there is a high probability that it will be a jackpot, so the storage upper limit number 203w is set to 3, and the process moves to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, if it is determined that the omen flag 203u is on (S5103: No), if all the pending winning information is a loss (that is, if the probability of a jackpot after that is low). Therefore, the storage upper limit number 203w is set to 2, and the process moves to S5107.

In the process of S5107, it is determined which of the storage channel 65e4 and the out channel 65e5 the game balls that have passed through the over winning switch 65a2 should be distributed to (S5107). This distribution is determined based on a table and a counter (not shown).

Specifically, if there is winning information that is a jackpot among the held winning information, a jackpot table is used, and if the counter value is between 0 and 2, the distribution destination is changed to the stored stream. In the case of "3 to 5", the out channel 65e5 is determined as the distribution destination. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/2, and the distribution destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5 with a probability of 1/2. On the other hand, if there is no jackpot winning information among the pending winning information, a table for losing is used, and if the counter value is "0 to 1", the distribution destination is set to the storage channel 65e4. In the case of "2 to 5", the distribution destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/3, and the distribution destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5 with a probability of 2/3.

In this way, if there is a jackpot in the pending winning information, the distribution destination is likely to be determined to the storage channel 65e4, and if there is no jackpot in the pending winning information, the distribution destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5. It is structured for ease of use. Note that this allocation ratio is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate.

After completing the process of S5107, it is determined whether the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 in the process of S5107 (S5108).

In the process of S5108, if it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 (S5108: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w. (S5109).

In the process of S5109, if it is determined that the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes), the distribution destination is set as the storage channel 65e4 and the drive of the distribution motor 65e2 is set ( S5111), the storage number counter 203v is incremented by 1 (S5112), and this process ends.

Through the process of S5111, the distribution motor 65c2 is driven and controlled, so that the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (leftward), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2. The position (orientation) is changed from the state where it is open to the state where it communicates with the storage channel 65e4. As a result, the game balls that flow down the over winning channel 65e2 and are stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the storage channel 65e4 and flow down to the storage area 65i via the storage channel 65e4. Become. After that, the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to the position (origin position) where it is in communication with the over-winning prize channel 65e2.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5 (S5108: No), and when it is determined that the value of the storage number counter 203v is the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes) sets the distribution destination to the out flow path 65e5 and sets the distribution motor 65c2 to drive (S5112), and ends this process.

By the process of S5112, the distribution motor 65c2 is drive-controlled, so that the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2. The position (orientation) is changed from the state where it is in contact with the out flow path 65e4. As a result, the game balls that flowed down the over winning channel 65e2 and were stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the out channel 65e4. Thereafter, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (leftward), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to the position (origin position) where it is in communication with the over winning prize channel 65e2.

In this way, in the distribution motor setting process (S1141), the upper limit number of game balls that can be distributed to the storage channel 65e4 is determined based on the pending winning information (that is, according to the expectation level of a jackpot after that). configured differently. As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 can be indicated to the player. Since the game can attract attention, the player's interest can be increased.

Furthermore, since the presentation section 65α is configured to be visible, the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be visually confirmed. This makes it possible to draw attention to the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, in the production section 65α, since a storage area 65i where game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 are stored is provided in a visible manner, the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 during a jackpot game can be checked. To provide a game machine that is easy to understand and easy for players to understand.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 133. In this control example, the first control example described above is changed so that the gaming method notification process (see FIG. 138) is executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135), and the jackpot related process (see FIG. 103) is changed. The difference is that jackpot related process 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead, and ending process 2 (see FIG. 137) is executed instead of ending process (see FIG. 105), and other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 135. In main processing 2, the processing of S1801 to S1811 is executed similarly to the main processing in the first control example described above (see FIG. 101).

When the process of S1811 is finished, a gaming method notification process is executed (S1831), and the process moves to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed similarly to the first control example described above. Details of the gaming method notification process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Here, details of the jackpot related process 2 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described with reference to FIG. 136. As described above, in this control example, the main control device 110 sends a closing command indicating that the specific prize opening 65a has been closed during a jackpot game and a storage discharge command indicating that a game ball has passed through the storage discharge switch 65a4. Sent from The jackpot-related processing 2 (S1912) in this control example is different from the jackpot-related processing in the first control example (see FIG. 103) in that it is changed to perform processing when these commands are received, and other The points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In jackpot related processing 2 (S1912), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S2001). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S2002), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received (S2003).

If it is determined that a round number command has been received in the process of S2003 (S2001: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S2004), and the round number for display is determined based on the value of the round number counter 223g. A number command is set (S2005). Then, the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is set to the open state (S2031), and this processing is ended.

By the process of S2031, the open state is set to the specific winning a prize opening state 223p based on having received the round number command indicating the start of a round from the main control device 110. Thereby, it can be determined that the number of winnings command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state is a normal winning (that is, not an over winning).

On the other hand, in the process of S2003, if it is determined that the number of rounds command has not been received (S2003: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of winnings command has been received (S2006).

In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the number of winnings command has been received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2032). In the process of S2032, if it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2032: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on over-winning, so over-winning processing is executed. (S2009), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2032, if it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2032: No), the received winning number command is a command based on normal winning, so the normal winning command is After setting (S2010), this process ends.

In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the prize winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not a closing command has been received (S2033). In the process of S2033, if it is determined that the closing command has been received (S2033: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2034), and this process ends.

In this way, the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is set to the closed state when a closing command is received from the main control device 110. Therefore, during the period from receiving the closing command from the main controller 110 until receiving the new round number command (that is, after the specific winning opening 65a finishes winning the specified number (10)) to the next specific winning opening. (until opening of the opening 65a), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state. Thereby, it is possible to determine that the number of winnings command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state is the number of winnings command based on over-winning.

Note that if the closed state is set based on the fact that a predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed, it may not be determined that an over-win has been made. In this case, it is sufficient to measure the elapsed time since the start of the round and determine whether or not the closing command has been received at the elapsed timing of the predetermined period.

In the process of S2033, if it is determined that a closing command has not been received (S2033: No), then it is determined whether a storage and discharge command has been received (S2035). In the process of S2035, if it is determined that the storage and discharge command has been received (S2035: Yes), the storage and discharge counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S2036), and this process ends.

The storage and discharge commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 by the number of game balls that were stored in the storage area 65i in the jackpot game, so when all the storage and discharge commands are received, the value of the storage and discharge counter 233r becomes the storage and discharge command. This is the number of game balls stored in the area 65i. Based on the value of this storage/discharge counter 223r, the display content of the ending effect is determined. That is, it is possible to display an ending effect according to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i. Thereby, in the jackpot game, it is possible to draw attention to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i, thereby improving the player's interest.

In the process of S2035, if it is determined that the storage and discharge command has not been received (S2035: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2011). In the process of S2011, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting process 2 is executed (S2012), the round number counter is set to 0 (S2013), and this process is executed. finish.

In the process of S2012, the display content of the ending effect is determined according to the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

In the process of S2011, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2011: No), the process of S2014 to S2015 is executed in the same way as the jackpot related process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 103). Execute and end this process.

Next, details of the ending setting process 2 (S2012) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 137. The ending setting process 2 (S2012) is different from the ending setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 105) in that the ending effect is selected according to the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r, and other The points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the ending effect processing 2 (S2012), first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201), and if it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), the ending effect is performed. The continuous effect is selected as (S2202), and the process moves to S2209.

In the process of S2201, if it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), it is determined whether the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is greater than 4 (S2231). In the process of S2231, if it is determined that the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is 4 or less (that is, if the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game is 4 or less), (S2231: No ), the normal ending effect is selected as the ending effect, and the process moves to S2209.

On the other hand, in the process of S2231, if it is determined that the value of the storage and discharge counter is larger than 4 (that is, if the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game is more than 4 balls), (S2231: Yes ), similarly to the ending setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 105), the processes from S2203 to S2208 are executed, and the process proceeds to S2209.

In the process of S2209, a display ending effect command indicating the ending effect selected in the process of S2203, S2205, S2207, S2208, or S2232 is set (S2209). Then, similarly to the ending setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 105), the processes of S2210 and S2211 are executed, and the present process ends.

In this way, in this control example, when the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, an ending effect is selected that suggests the expectation that there is winning information that will become a jackpot in the hold, but the storage and discharge counter 223r When the value of the counter 223r is 1 or less, a normal ending effect is selected. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the value of the storage and discharge counter will be 2 or more in the jackpot game (that is, 2 or more game balls will enter the storage area 65i), so the player's interest can be improved.

Although the case where the value of the storage/discharge counter 223r is 2 or more is described, the value is not limited to this, and the value may be 3 or more, or such a limit may not be set.

Furthermore, only when the value of the storage and discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately suggests whether or not there is winning information that will become a jackpot) is displayed. You may also do so.

Furthermore, it is also possible to change the table for selecting the ending effect according to the value of the storage/discharge counter 223r.

Next, details of the gaming method notification process (S1831) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 138. The gaming method notification process (S1831) determines whether the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side of the third symbol display device 81 (a so-called left-handed gaming state), and a third symbol display. This is a process for suggesting (displaying) which of the game states is a game state in which a game ball is shot down the right side of the device 81 (a so-called right-handed game state).

In the gaming method notification process (S1831), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is a time saving gaming state or a variable probability gaming state (S5201). In the process of S5201, if it is determined that the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a variable probability gaming state (S5201: Yes), it is a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is required, so a right-handed hitting suggestion command for display is set (S5202). ).

The display right hitting suggestion command set by the process of S5202 is sent to the display control device 114, and when the display control device 114 receives the display right hitting suggestion command, the third symbol display device 81 or the sub An image suggesting right-handed hitting is displayed on one of the liquid crystal display devices 523. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that the gaming state is a gaming state in which the player plays right-handed, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

When the process of S5202 is finished, a right-handed hitting suggestion LED lighting command is set (S5203), and this process ends. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 are repeatedly turned on and off one by one in the order of 295a to 295j by the right-hand hitting suggestion LED command set in the process of S5203. It will be done. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order from 295a to 295j, so the LEDs are lit clockwise (clockwise), so that the player is directed to the right. It is possible to suggest (notify) that the game state is to play. As a result, even when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is in an inverted state, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b can indicate (notify) that the game is in a right-handed game state. .

In addition, the indication (notification) that this game state is for right-handed hitting is that even if the sub-LCD display device 523 rotates, the LEDs will still light up clockwise (clockwise). Therefore, suggestions (notifications) can be made using the same control.

On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the time-saving or variable probability gaming state (S5201: No), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the through gate 67 or not.

In the process of S5201, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S5201: Yes), the ball placed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed even though the game state is a left-handed game state. This is a case where the game ball passes through the through gate 67 provided (that is, when a right-handed game is being played), so in order to suggest (notify) that the game is a left-handed game state, the processing in S5205 is performed. Move to.

In the process of S5205, a left-handed hitting suggestion command for display is set (S5205). The left-hand hitting suggestion command for display set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the display control device 114 receives the left-hand hitting suggestion command for display, the third symbol display device 81 or the sub The words "Please return to left-handed hitting!" are displayed on one of the liquid crystal display devices 523. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that the gaming state is a gaming state in which the player plays right-handed, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

When the process of S5205 is finished, a left-handed hitting suggestion LED command is set (S5206), and this process ends. By the left-handed hitting suggestion LED command set in the process of S5205, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 are turned on and off one by one in the order of 295j to a. It will be done. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order from 295a to 295j, so the LEDs are lit counterclockwise (counterclockwise), giving a warning to the player. It is possible to suggest (notify) that the player is in a game state in which he is playing left-handed. As a result, even when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is in an inverted state, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b can suggest (notify) that a left-handed game is being played. .

In addition, the suggestion (notification) that this is a game state in which left-handed hitting is performed is that even if the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 rotates, the LED will not be lit counterclockwise (counterclockwise). Since there is no change, suggestions (notifications) can be made using the same control.

As explained above, in this second control example, the distribution ratio for distributing over-winning game balls during a jackpot to the storage flow path 65e4 is determined based on the pending winning information (i.e., when a jackpot occurs after that). (depending on your expectations), configured differently. As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 can be indicated to the player. Since the game can attract attention, the player's interest can be increased.

In the second control example, the production section 65α in which the distribution member 65c for distributing the over-winning game balls during the jackpot is arranged is configured to be visible. Thereby, the player can visually confirm the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c and draw attention to the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the second control example, in the production section 65α, a storage area 65i in which game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 are stored is provided so as to be visible. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 during the jackpot game, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for players to understand.

In the second control example, game balls that have won an excessive amount of money during a jackpot game are stored in an area that is visible to the player, and a jackpot is determined according to the number of stored game balls (value of the storage discharge counter 223r). The game is configured so that the content of the ending performance of the game can be varied. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Note that only when the value of the storage/discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately suggests whether or not there is winning information that will become a jackpot) is displayed. You may also do so.

In the second control example, direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j for indicating the gaming state (the direction in which the game balls are launched) are arranged in a circumferential manner on the decorative surface 523b of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523; The lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) indicates the gaming state. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed in reverse, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged circumferentially.

<About the third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as an eleventh embodiment with reference to FIGS. 139 to 145.

In the first control example described above, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2, which are the back side of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, are used. We have described a gaming machine that performs a performance that

On the other hand, in this third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, the upper display surface 523a1 facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the lower display surface The screen 523a2 is configured to be able to perform a mirror effect in which the content displayed on the screen 523a2 is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine via a mirror 298. As a result, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2), which is the surface on the back side thereof, can be used simultaneously for production, so it is possible to increase the variation of production. It is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, in the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged to perform the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror), and when viewed from the bright side, light is reflected and becomes a mirror. However, when viewed from the dark side, light passes through it, making it look like a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror rear LED 296 is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by lighting the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror. On the other hand, by lighting the LED 297 on the back side of the mirror, the back side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass).

In this control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) that is reversed and becomes the rear side is ready for display (after the display contents are reversed), the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on, The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. This prevents the player from seeing the display surfaces (523a1, 523a2) before they are ready for display, making it possible to provide suitable effects.

Here, the effect mode of the mirror effect in this control example will be explained. FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram schematically showing mirror effects in this control example. FIG. 139(a) schematically shows a state in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 are slid to a close position, as seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), in the mirror effect in this control example, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 are slid in the left and right direction to be changed to a close position, and the At this position, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are reversed, and the upper decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

A left mirror 298a is arranged at the rear left side of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, and a right mirror 298b is arranged at the rear right side. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are tilted toward the rear (rear side) toward the center of the pachinko machine 10, and when viewed from the top side, the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are tilted. It has a square-shaped arrangement (see FIG. 139(b)). Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the back side of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, which is disposed closer to the center than each mirror 298, from the front side through the right mirror 298a and the left mirror 298.

A right mirror front LED 296a is arranged on the front side of the right mirror 298a, and a left mirror front LED 296b is arranged on the front side of the left mirror 298b. Further, a left mirror back LED 297a is arranged on the back side of the left mirror 298a, and a right mirror back LED 297b is arranged on the back side of the right mirror 298b. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are each configured as a one-way mirror, and when the left mirror front side LED 296a is lit, the left mirror 298a becomes a mirror and changes the display mode of the upper display surface 523a or the upper decorative surface 523b1. Decorative aspects can be displayed. When the left mirror rear LED 297a is lit, the magic mirror can be seen through and the rear side can be seen (it is not a mirror but a transparent member) and does not form a mirror surface, so that the rear side of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is not reflected on the left mirror 298a. It is composed of The right mirror 298b is similarly configured.

With this configuration, the state of the back side of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 can be switched between a state where it is visible to the player and a state where it is not visible to the player, thereby providing a fresh performance to the player. I can do it.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

This third control example differs from the first control example described above in that a mirror front LED 296 and a mirror rear LED 297 are connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device, and that the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 is The difference is that the contents and the contents of the RAM 223 have been partially changed, and other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 141. As shown in FIG. 141(a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is added to the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, and other points are the same. It is. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 141(b). The mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is a scenario for sliding the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and then reversing them.

The mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 includes a setting value (operating speed (pps)) to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver), corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m that indicates the elapsed time since the start of the variable display. , number of motion steps, and direction of motion) are defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141(b), in response to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m, the slide motor 431 is defined as the operating target, 50 pps is defined as the operating speed, and the number of operating steps is 100 is defined as 100, and the forward direction is defined as the operating direction.

Corresponding to the value "2001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as the operating target, 100 pps is defined as the operating speed, 200 is defined as the number of operating steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operating direction. ing.

Corresponding to the value "8001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as the operating target, 100 pps is defined as the operating speed, 200 is defined as the number of operating steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operating direction. ing.

Corresponding to the value "10001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as the operating target, 50 pps is defined as the operating speed, 100 is defined as the number of operating steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operating direction. ing.

Information of "END" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value "12001" of the driving scenario counter 223m.

In this way, in the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides from the remote position to the close position over a period of 2 seconds, and in the close position, from the normal position to the reflective position (the display surface facing the back side (523a1 , 523a2) to a position where it can be seen from the front side through the mirror 298), then it is maintained at the reflection position for 4 seconds, and then it takes 2 seconds again from the reflection position to the normal position. It is reversed and slides from the close position to the separated position over a period of 2 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a mirror effect flag 223s is added, and other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mirror effect flag 223s is a flag for determining whether or not the mirror effect is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the mirror effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the mirror effect is not being executed. Indicates that there is no This mirror effect flag 223s is turned on when the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is set as the drive scenario (that is, when the mirror effect is set as the effect pattern) in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 145). Set. When the mirror effect flag 223s is on, in the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 144), the mirror front LED 296 and mirror rear LED 297 are controlled to turn on and off, and the display content is reversed for the display control device 114. A notification of the command to do so will be sent. Although not shown in the drawings, when the variable display in which the mirror effect is performed is completed, it is set to off.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that it executes mirror effect setting processing (see Fig. 143) in main processing 3 (see Fig. 143), and variable display setting processing (see Fig. 106). The difference is that a variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) is executed instead of , and other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, main processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 143. In main processing 3, the processing of S1801 to S1811 is executed similarly to the main processing in the first control example described above (see FIG. 101).

When the process of S1811 is finished, a mirror effect setting process is executed (S1851), and the process moves to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed similarly to the first control example described above.

Here, with reference to FIG. 144, details of the mirror effect setting process (S1851) executed in main process 3 (see FIG. 143) will be described. The mirror effect setting process (S1851), when the mirror effect is being executed, controls the lighting/extinguishing of the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297, and sends a command to the display control device 114 to invert the display contents. This is a process for notification.

In the mirror effect setting process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the mirror effect flag 223s is on. In the process of S1851, if it is determined that the flag 223s during mirror effect is off (S5301: No), the process is ended because the mirror effect is not being executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the mirror effect flag 223s is on (S5301: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302). In the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302: Yes), the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF in order to prevent the mirror 298 from functioning as a mirror (S5303 ), the mirror rear LED 297 is set to ON (S5304), and this process ends.

In the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 1 (S5302: No), then it is determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305).

In the process of S5305, if it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305: Yes), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slide to a close position. This is the timing when the reversing operation is completed at the adjacent position. In this case, in order to make the display surfaces (523a1, 523a2) facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 visible from the front side via the mirror 298 by performing a reversing operation, the process proceeds to S5306. Transition.

In the process of S5306, a display reversal correction start command is set (S5306), the mirror front LED 296 is set to ON (S5307), the mirror rear LED 297 is set to OFF (S5308), and this process ends. As a result, the display contents on the display surfaces (523a1, 523a2) are reversed symmetrically (that is, the display contents become normal when viewed through the mirror), and the front side of the mirror 298 becomes brighter, so that the mirror 298 will function as a mirror.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, if it is determined that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 4000 (S5305: No), then it is determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309).

In the process of S5309, if it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309: Yes), it is the timing when the display surface facing the rear side is reversed to the front side in the mirror effect. .

In this case, the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF (S5310), the mirror rear LED 297 is set to ON (S5311), a display reversal correction end command is set (S5312), and this process ends.

Through the processing from S5310 to S5312, the display contents of the display screen (523a1, 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 whose display is controlled by the display control device 114 are set to a normal state, and the mirror 298 is set to a state where it does not function as a mirror. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S5309, if it is determined that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 8000 (S5309: No), then it is determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313).

In the process of S5313, if it is determined that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313: Yes), it is the end timing of the mirror effect, so the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF (S5314), and the mirror The rear LED 297 is set to OFF (S5315), and this process ends.

As a result of the processing in S5313 and S5314, when the mirror effect is not being performed, the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 can be turned off, so power consumption can be reduced.

Next, details of the variable display setting process 3 (S1813) will be described with reference to FIG. 145. Fluctuation display setting processing 3 (S1813) executes the processing from S2301 to S2307 similarly to the first control example. When the process of S2307 is finished, it is determined whether the driving scenario stored in the process of S2306 is a driving scenario corresponding to mirror effect (S2351).

In the process of S2351, if it is determined that the driving scenario is a driving scenario that corresponds to mirror effect (S2351: Yes), this means that a variable pattern including mirror effect has been set, so the mirror effect flag 223s is set. is set to ON, and the process moves to S2308.

On the other hand, in the process of S2351, if it is determined that the driving scenario is a driving scenario that does not support mirror effects (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2308.

After S2308, the processes from S2308 to S2312 are executed in the same way as in the first control example described above, and the present process ends.

In this way, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 are The screen 523a2 is configured to be able to perform a mirror effect in which the content displayed on the screen 523a2 is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine via a mirror 298. As a result, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2), which is the surface on the back side thereof, can be used simultaneously for production, so it is possible to increase the variation of production. It is possible to improve the player's interest.

In the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged to perform the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror). When viewed from the bright side, it reflects light and becomes a mirror, but when viewed from the dark side, light passes through it and resembles a window. A mirror front LED 296 was provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror rear LED was provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by lighting the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror. On the other hand, by lighting the LED 297 on the back side of the mirror, the back side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass). In this way, by controlling the lighting of the LED, it is possible to change whether the mirror 298 functions as a mirror or a window.

In addition, when functioning as a window, by visually providing a pattern, design, etc. on the back side of the mirror 298, an integrated effect with the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 can be achieved. Furthermore, by arranging LEDs for presentation on the back side and changing the lighting pattern of the LEDs, it is also possible to change the pattern or design that becomes visible when the mirror 298 functions as a window. This makes it possible to increase the variety of performances, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the third control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) that is reversed and becomes the rear side is ready for display (after the display contents are reversed), the LED 297 on the front side of the mirror is turned on. , the mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. This prevents the player from seeing the display surfaces (523a1, 523a2) before they are ready for display, making it possible to provide suitable effects.

In addition, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be suggested (notified) depending on whether or not the mirror 298 functions as a mirror in the mirror effect. As a result, in the mirror effect, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid from the separated position to the close position, and after the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are reversed in the close position, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are moved in the close position. Since it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the display contents on the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are displayed through the mirror 298, the player's interest can be improved.

<Modified example of the third control example>
Next, a modification of the mirror effect described in FIG. 139 will be described with reference to FIG. 146. In this control example, when performing a mirror effect that allows the player to view the back side of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, a left back mirror member 299a is installed between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 523. The right rear mirror member 299b is moved to project (reflect) the image onto the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b. With this configuration, even when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is completely reversed to a position where it faces the third symbol display device 81 in parallel, the back side of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 of the sub-liquid crystal display mode with the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 completely flattened.

<About the modification of the first control example>
Next, a modification of the effect display in the first control example described above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 148 to 150. 148 to 150 show the effect displays shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 in the first control example in which the order in which each symbol (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) overlaps is different, and a special This technology is used in a technique that uses a presentation display to notify whether the current jackpot is a regular jackpot or a fixed variable jackpot after displaying the third symbol that the symbol has won a jackpot (so-called fixed variable promotion effect). be.

In this case, when the fixed promotion effect is started, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid so that the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered (the upper display surface 523a1 and (sliding movement so that the lower display surface 523a2 comes into contact with the lower display surface 523a2), and displays on the display surface of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 that the "probable change promotion performance" is to be started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148(a), one promotion effect symbol is enlarged and displayed. The promotion effect symbols displayed in this case are different from the third symbols displayed in response to the normal game (special symbol variation game), and are character symbols in which the portions indicating numbers are deleted. If the character design displayed in this state is in the same manner (character) as the "probable variable design" (designs with specific numbers, for example, "3" and "7") used in normal games, , an effect display indicating that the player has won the definite change jackpot due to the "definite change promotion effect".

On the other hand, if the character design displayed in this state is the same mode (character) as a symbol other than the "definite change pattern" used in normal games, the "definite change promotion" will not be announced without informing you that you have won the sure change jackpot. The performance continues.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 148(b) to 150(b), the display area is gradually expanded by sliding the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 until the display area reaches the state shown in FIG. 150(b). When enlarged, of the three character designs displayed in a row in the vertical direction, some of the character designs (for example, the character design displayed in the center) are given an aspect showing numbers.

If the number given in this case is the number attached to the "probability variable symbol" used in normal games (for example, "3", "7"), you have won the probability variable jackpot due to the "probability variation promotion effect". There will be a presentation display indicating that. In other words, the character design used in this "probable change promotion performance" is the same character as the third design used in the normal game, and the character design has a plurality of numbers (at least, numbers attached to the "definite change pattern"). It is configured so that an aspect indicating a number other than a ``probability-variable pattern'' and a number other than a ``probability-variable pattern'' is attached.

According to the above-mentioned "definitely variable promotion performance", the timing at which the character design is displayed to the player (see FIG. 148(a)) and the timing at which the character design is given a number indicating mode (FIG. 150(b)) ) It becomes possible to notify that you have won the probability-variable jackpot at two timings. Therefore, from the start to the end of the ``definite change promotion performance'', the player watches the performance while expecting to be promoted to the definite change jackpot, which can improve the interest of the game. effective.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "definitely variable promotion effect", a mode indicating a number is attached to each of the three character symbols displayed in the vertical direction, and the number attached to each character symbol is determined according to a predetermined rule (adding the number If the winning number is an odd number, or if the number satisfies a predetermined rule (for example, "341"), it may be announced that the probability variable jackpot has been won. This makes it possible to use enlargement of the display area more effectively for presentation.

In addition, the timing at which numbers are added to the three character designs displayed vertically will be shifted, and the appearance of the three character designs displayed vertically will be changed in the middle of the ``definite promotion effect.'' You can do it like this.

<About the fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a twelfth embodiment with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. In the fourth control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, after transmitting the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game as a command indicating the timing in the jackpot game, only the closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is sent. is configured to be transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time after receiving the closing command. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, thereby reducing the processing load.

First, with reference to FIG. 151, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The RAM 223 in this control example is different from the first control example in that a specific winning opening state 223p, a jackpot flag 223t, and a time counter 223u are added, and other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning hole state 223p stores information indicating whether or not a game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, indicating that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the specific When the winning opening state 223p is in a closed state, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in a closed state, and it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. shows. The specific winning hole state 223p is set to the open state when it is determined that it is the round start timing in the jackpot game timing process (see FIG. 156) (see S5306 in FIG. 156), and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning hole 65a is set. The closed state is set when a closing command based on the closing of is received (see S2074 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning a prize opening state 223p is referred to when a winning prize number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2072 in FIG. 156), and whether the received winning prize number command is a command based on a normal winning prize, or , it is determined whether the command is based on over winning.

The jackpot flag 223t is a flag for determining whether a jackpot game is being executed, and when it is on, it indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that a jackpot game is being executed. Indicates that there is no This jackpot flag 223t is set to ON when an opening command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2071). Then, in the jackpot time measurement process (see FIG. 156), it is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot game is being executed (see S5301 in FIG. 156), and when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending of the jackpot game. , is set to off (see S5310 in FIG. 156).

<About the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In this control example, compared to the first control example described above, a jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) with some processes changed in place of the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed, and the ending The difference is that ending process 4 (S1110) with some processes changed is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 96), and other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) will be described with reference to FIG. 152. The jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) is different from the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 95) in the first control example in that the round number command is not set, and the other points are the same, so the details Further explanations will be omitted.

Although details will be described later, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the start of a round by measuring the elapsed time after receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for a round number command from the main control device 110 that indicates the start of a round in a jackpot game, and the processing load can be reduced.

Next, details of the ending process 4 (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 153. Ending process 4 (S1110) differs from the ending process in the first control example (FIG. 96) in that an ending command is not set, and is otherwise the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As will be described in detail later, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the start of the ending by counting the elapsed time since receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round and the number of rounds executed. There is. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an ending command from the main control device 110 that indicates the start of an ending in a jackpot game, and the processing load can be reduced.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. In this control example, compared to the first control example described above, jackpot related processing 4 (S1912) is executed in which some processes are changed in place of the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 103), and jackpot timing processing The difference is that (see FIG. 156) is newly executed, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 154. In main processing 4, the processing of S1801 to S1811 is executed similarly to the main processing in the first control example described above (see FIG. 101).

When the process of S1811 is finished, a jackpot time measurement process is executed (S1831), and the process moves to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed similarly to the first control example described above. Details of the jackpot time counting process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, details of the jackpot related process 4 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described with reference to FIG. 155. In the jackpot related process 4 (S1912), compared to the first control example, when an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received, the jackpot flag 223t is set to on, and a specific prize is won during a jackpot game. Based on the reception of the closure command indicating that the mouth 65a is closed, the elapsed time from the reception of the closure command is measured, and when the round number command and ending command are received. The difference is that the processing has been deleted, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In jackpot related processing 4 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2001), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), an opening command for display is set. (S2002), sets the jackpot flag to ON (S2071), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006). In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the number of winnings command has been received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2072).

In the process of S2072, if it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2072: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on over-winning, so over-winning processing is executed. (S2009), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2072, if it is determined that the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is in the open state (S2072: No), the received prize winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, so the normal winning prize command is After setting (S2010), this process ends.

In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the prize winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not a closing command has been received (S2073).

In the process of S2073, if it is determined that a closing command has been received (S2073: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2074), and the time counter 223u is set to 0 (S2075). ), this process ends.

By the process of S2075, the time counter 223u is initialized to 0 every time the specific winning hole 65a is closed. Thereby, it is possible to time the elapsed time after the specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2073, if it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S2073: No), the process of S2014 to S2015 is executed similarly to the first control example, and the present process ends.

Next, details of the jackpot time measurement process (S1831) executed in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154) of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The jackpot timing process (S1831) is a process that is executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154), and is a process that measures time to determine the round start timing and ending timing in the jackpot game.

In the jackpot time counting process (S1831), first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 223t is on (S5301). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 223t is off (S5301: No), the process is ended because the jackpot game is not in progress and there is no need to measure time.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 223t is on (S5301: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the time counter 223u (S5302), and the added value of the time counter 223u is Based on this, it is determined whether or not it is the round start timing (S5303).

Specifically, if the value of the time counter 223u is 4000, this means that 4 seconds have passed since the end of the round, so it is determined that it is time to start the round.

If it is determined in the process of S5303 that it is the round start timing (S5303: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S5304), a round number command for display is set (S5305), and a specific winning prize is determined. The mouth state 223p is set to the open state (S5306), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5303, if it is determined that it is not the round start timing (S5303: No), then it is determined whether it is the ending start timing (S5307).

Specifically, when the value of the round number counter 223g is 16 and the value of the time counter 223u is smaller than 400, the value of the time counter 223u is set to 0 by receiving a closing command in the final round. It is determined that this is the case, and it is determined that it is the ending start timing.

In addition, when starting the ending performance after a predetermined period after the specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed in the final round, it is sufficient to wait until the time counter 223u reaches the predetermined period.

In the process of S5307, if it is determined that it is the ending start timing (S5307), the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) similar to the first control example is executed (S5308), and the round number counter is set to 0. (S5309), sets the jackpot flag 223t to OFF (S5310), and ends this process.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, after transmitting the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game as a command indicating the timing in the jackpot game, only the closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is sent as the command indicating the timing in the jackpot game. The configuration is such that the information is transmitted from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time after receiving the closing command. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, thereby reducing the processing load.

<Modification 2 in the first control example>
Next, a modification of the opening/closing display performance in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid up and down. FIG. 157(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 overlaps with the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 523. be done. A blinking decorative pattern Z is displayed on the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2. It shows that the middle symbol which becomes the reach display mode is changing.

FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start sliding vertically relative to each other. The reach symbols are each moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbols are moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A school of fish effect (effect in which a school of fish is displayed in a changing manner) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158(c), as the sliding amount of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 increases, the school of fish moves toward the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and is displayed. In this way, the display of a school of fish is configured such that the area where the medium pattern is displayed is a school of small numbers of fish, and the area where the medium pattern is not displayed is a school of large numbers of fish moving to be displayed. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to display a school of fish changing in accordance with the sliding direction of the sub-LCD display device 523, and to effectively utilize the display area expanded by sliding, the school of fish can be displayed as it moves. It is possible to widen the area to be used.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid left and right (slides outward in the left and right direction). FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 overlaps with the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 523. be done. A blinking decorative pattern Z is displayed on the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2. It shows that the middle symbol which becomes the reach display mode is changing.

FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start sliding outward from each other. The reach symbols are each moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbols are moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A school of fish effect (effect in which a school of fish is displayed in a changing manner) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158(c), as the sliding amount of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 increases, the school of fish moves toward the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and is displayed. In this way, the display of a school of fish is configured such that the area where the medium pattern is displayed is a school of small numbers of fish, and the area where the medium pattern is not displayed is a school of large numbers of fish moving to be displayed. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to display a school of fish changing in accordance with the sliding direction of the sub-LCD display device 523, and to effectively utilize the display area expanded by sliding, the school of fish can be displayed as it moves. It is possible to widen the area to be used.

Note that when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 rotates to the states shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, the rotation coordinates and display coordinates of the display data of the similar fish school effect are corrected and set, so that the respective display is configured to be Thereby, it is not necessary to separately store the fish school data when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 rotates, and the amount of data can be suppressed.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 168. In the first embodiment, a detailed explanation of the liquid crystal display device 523 was omitted, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the internal configuration of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be explained in detail. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 161. FIG. 159(a) is a front view of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159(b) is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective front view of the liquid crystal display device 523, and FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523.

As shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the liquid crystal display device 523 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a front case 541 disposed on the front side (player side) and a rear side of the front case 541. a liquid crystal device 543 disposed between the opposing front case 541 and the rear case 542, a substrate member 545 disposed on the rear side of the liquid crystal device 543, a liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and an intervening member 544 interposed between the opposing members 545.

The front case 541 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the back side, and a rectangular front opening 541a is formed in the bottom surface thereof to penetrate in the thickness direction. The front case 541 is formed so that the liquid crystal device 543 can be disposed inside from the rear opening 541b side which opens on one side. This makes the liquid crystal device 543 visible to the player through the front opening 541a.

The front case 541 has two recessed portions 541c recessed inside the left and right side surfaces at two locations on the upper and lower sides. Further, a through hole 541d that penetrates in the longitudinal direction of the front case 541 (left-right direction in FIG. 159(a)) is formed at the tip of the recessed portion 541c.

Furthermore, a recess 541c formed at one end in the longitudinal direction of the front case 541 (on the left side in FIG. 159(a)) has a recess that is recessed from the rear opening 541b side to the front opening 541a side at the tip of the recess. 541c1 is formed. The recessed portion 541c1 is a recess into which an engaging portion 544b of an intervening member 544, which will be described later, is engaged.

The liquid crystal device 543 includes a liquid crystal display 543a for displaying symbols and the like on the front side (a surface visible to the player through the front opening 541a). The liquid crystal device 543 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its transverse dimension is set to be approximately the same as the transverse dimension inside the rear opening 541b, and its longitudinal dimension is set on the left and right sides of the front case 541. The width dimension is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension between the opposing recesses 541c.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541, its upper, lower, left and right side surfaces are in contact with the inner wall of the front case 541. This makes it difficult for the liquid crystal device 543 to shift relative to the front case 541.

Further, the back surface of the liquid crystal device 543 (the surface opposite to the liquid crystal display 543a) is covered with a back surface portion 543c formed from a plate member made of a metal material. The back surface portion 543c is a shield member for blocking electrical noise (reducing the influence of electrical noise on the liquid crystal device 543), and is connected to a substrate member 54 and a conductive member 546 (connection means), which will be described later. electrically connected. Thereby, static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 (back surface portion 543c) can be released to the substrate member 545 via the conductive member 546.

The thickness of the liquid crystal device 543 (the dimension in the depth direction in FIG. 159(a)) is set to be smaller than the distance from the back opening 541b side to the front opening 541a side of the inner part of the front case 541. . Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 can be housed inside the front case 541. Further, the front case 541 is formed with an upright portion 541e that stands up on the inner surface on one side in the transverse direction (lower side in FIG. 159(a)).

The upright portion 541e is formed so as to partially protrude from a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction of the front case 541. The distance between the opposing inner surface of the front case 541 on the rear opening 541b side and the side surface of the upright portion 541e is set to be approximately the same as the thickness of the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541, the side surface of the upright portion 541e and the liquid crystal device 543 are in contact with each other.

That is, the upright portion 541e is brought into engagement with the lower end portion of the liquid crystal device 543. As a result, when the liquid crystal device 543 is placed inside the front case 541, the liquid crystal device 543 is prevented from shifting in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 comes out of the rear case 542) with respect to the front case 541. It's easy to do.

The liquid crystal display 543a is formed to have substantially the same shape as the opening 541a of the front case 541 when viewed from the front, and its size is set to be substantially the same as the opening 541a. This allows the player to view the entire area of the liquid crystal display 543a through the opening 541a of the front case 541.

The liquid crystal device 543 includes fastening holes 543b formed in a circular shape at both ends in the longitudinal direction. The fastening hole 543b is a hole into which the tip of a screw inserted into the through hole 541d of the front case 541 is fastened, and when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled, the axis of the fastening hole 543b is aligned with the axis of the through hole 541d. It is located and formed in a shape. Thereby, with the liquid crystal device 543 disposed inside the front case 541, the liquid crystal device 543 can be fixed to the front case 541 by fastening a screw to the fastening hole 543b through the through hole 541d.

Further, as described above, since the through hole 541d is formed at the recessed tip of the recess 541c, the head of the screw can be accommodated inside the recess 541c when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled. Further, a wall portion is formed on the front opening side 541a side of the front case 541 to cover the space of the recessed portion 541c. On the other hand, a rear case 542 is attached to the rear opening side 541a of the recess 541c at a position facing the recess 541c. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the connecting portion between the front case 541 and the liquid crystal device 543.

The interposed member 544 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of openings 544a that open in the plate thickness direction (from the liquid crystal device 543 side to the substrate member 545 side) and that protrudes in the longitudinal direction from one end in the longitudinal direction. The plate mainly includes an engaging portion 544b, and a through hole 544c formed at the other longitudinal end in the thickness direction.

The opening 544a has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and its inner wall is formed along the thickness direction. In this embodiment, four locations are formed on the intervening member 544. Further, a plurality of openings 544a are formed on one longitudinal end side (left side in FIG. 159(a)) rather than the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and each opening 544a is formed at a different position in the longitudinal direction.

Since the pair of third portions 546b5 are arranged at different positions in the opening direction of the endless strip (cloth member 546b), the deformability of the cloth member 546b in the opening direction of the endless strip can be enhanced.

Further, the four openings 544a are formed on one side in the width direction (lower side in FIG. 159(a)) than the center position in the width direction of the intervening member 544. The intervening member 544 is formed to have an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the front view shape of the front case 541, and is disposed on the back surface of the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, the four openings 544a are located on one side in the width direction (lower side in FIG. 159(a)) than the center position in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (front case 541).

As described above, a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged to face the back case 300 (see FIG. 7). Therefore, when the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 faces the player (the state shown in FIGS. 7 and 11), the opening 544a is arranged biased toward the opposite side.

The engaging portion 544b is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction from the end face of the interposed member 544 on one longitudinal end side (the left side in FIG. It is bent in both directions (vertical direction in FIG. 159(a)). That is, the engaging portion 544b is formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front.

The distal end of the engaging portion 544b is disposed inside the recessed portion 541c via the recessed portion 541c1. Therefore, one end of the intervening member 544 in the longitudinal direction (the engaging portion 544b side) can be positioned with respect to the front case 541 in the lateral direction.

The through hole 544c is formed to penetrate in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction. The through hole 544c has an inner diameter that is approximately the same as or larger than the outer diameter of a protrusion 541f that is formed in a cylindrical shape protruding from the back of the other end of the front case 541 (right side in FIG. 159(a)). is also set slightly larger. Furthermore, the through hole 544c and the protrusion 541f are coaxially formed when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled.

Therefore, when attaching the intervening member 544 to the back surface of the liquid crystal device 543, the protrusion 541f can be inserted into the through hole 544c. As a result, the other longitudinal end of the intervening member 544 (the through hole 554c side) can be positioned with respect to the front case 541.

As described above, the intervening member 544 is positioned on both sides in the longitudinal direction with respect to the front case 541 by the through hole 544c and the engaging portion 544b. As a result, movement (displacement) of the intervening member 544 with respect to the front case 541 can be suppressed.

The substrate member 545 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and is smaller than the shape of the rear case 542 when viewed from the front. The substrate member 545 is formed with a plurality of LEDs that emit light toward the back case 542 on the back surface on the back case 542 side. This allows the back case 542, which will be described later, to emit light.

Further, the substrate member 545 includes a first region 545a in which a plurality of protrusions 545a1 (see FIG. 164) protruding toward the front case 541 are formed. Note that a detailed explanation of the first region 545a will be given later.

Note that the substrate member 545 has a plurality of through holes that open circularly in the thickness direction, and the through holes fit into the plurality of cylindrical protrusions that protrude from the intervening member 544, so that the intervening member 544.

The rear case 542 has a shape in front view that is substantially the same as the shape in a front view of the front case 541 , and is formed to have a size that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front case 541 . Further, the back case 542 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the front case 541 side. Therefore, by combining the front case 541 and the back case 542, the liquid crystal device 543, the intervening member 544, and the substrate member 545 can be arranged between the front case 541 and the back case 542 facing each other (on the inside).

Next, the conductive member 546 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 is an exploded view of the liquid crystal display device 523. 163(a) is a top view of the conductive member 546, and FIG. 163(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 546 taken along the line CLXIIIb-CLXIIIb in FIG. 163(a). Note that FIG. 162 shows an exploded state at a portion between the liquid crystal device 543 and the intervening member 544.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled, the front portion of the conductive member 546 on the front case 541 side (the upper portion in FIG. 163(a)) is inserted inside the opening 544a. . Further, the front portion of the conductive member 546 is brought into contact with the back portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543, and the back portion (lower portion in FIG. 163(b)) is brought into contact with the first region 545a of the substrate member 545. .

The conductive member 546 is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped long in one direction (left-right direction in FIG. 163(a)) before being assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523 (between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545). The conductive member 546 is connected to the opening 544a of the intervening member 544 with its longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 163(a)) parallel to the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 165) of the opening 544a of the intervening member 544. placed inside.

In addition, the conductive member 546 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front before being assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, and its longitudinal dimension is the longitudinal distance of the opening 544a of the intervening member 554. The dimension in the lateral direction is formed to be smaller than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the opening 544a.

In addition, when the conductive member 546 is assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 546 is constricted toward the inside in the longitudinal direction at an intermediate portion between the contact surface with the back portion 543c and the contact surface with the first region 545a. A constricted portion 546c is provided.

The conductive member 546 mainly includes an elastic member 546a made of an elastic material, and cloth members 546b disposed on four faces of the elastic member 546a except for two opposing faces.

The elastic member 546a is formed from a non-conductive spongy material. Furthermore, when the cloth member 546b is not disposed, the elastic member 546a has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in one direction (that is, the constricted portion 546c of the conductive member 546 is not formed). In this embodiment, the elastic member 546a is formed of a synthetic sponge foamed from a synthetic resin of polyurethane.

The cloth member 546b is formed from an endless belt-like cloth (conductive cloth in this embodiment) in which fibers made of a conductive metal material are woven together. Further, since the cloth member 546b is made of a fibrous body made of a metal material, it is easily deformed, and when the cloth member 546b is wound around the four sides of the elastic member 546a, the back surface of the conductive member 546 is attached to the liquid crystal display device 523. By creating creases at both longitudinal ends (right and left in FIG. 163(a)) of the intermediate portion between the contact surface with the conductive member 543c and the contact surface with the first region 545a, the constricted portion 546c of the conductive member 546 is can be formed.

Further, in the conductive member 546, the cloth member 546b is formed into an endless band shape, and the elastic member 546a is fitted inside the cloth member 546b, so that assembly of the conductive member 546 is simplified and component costs are reduced. be able to.

Furthermore, by forming the cloth member 546b from a conductive cloth, its flexibility can be ensured, so that the durability can be improved even when the cloth member 546b is repeatedly deformed due to relative displacement of the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545. You can improve your performance.

In addition, although the cloth member 546b is formed from a conductive cloth in this embodiment, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be formed from a conductive nonwoven fabric. An example of the conductive cloth or conductive nonwoven fabric is a fabric (sheet) made by intertwining threads of polyester fiber coated with one or both of copper and nickel on the outer surface with or without weaving. . Examples of weaving methods include plain weave and twill weave.

The cloth member 546b includes a first portion 546b3 that comes into contact with one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543, a second portion 546b4 that comes into contact with the ground portion 545d (protrusion 545a1) of the substrate member 545, and A pair of third portions 546b5 that connect the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, and the width dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 (the contact surface The width dimension of the third portion 546b5 (a pair of The dimension between the three portions 546b facing each other (dimension L12 (see FIG. 163(b))) is set to be a small dimension in at least part of the three portions 546b.

Therefore, by using the third portion 546b5, the cloth member 546b can be easily deformed in the direction of the endless band opening. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in the direction perpendicular to the facing direction thereof, in the direction of the endless strip-shaped opening of the cloth member 546b, the first portion 546b3 and the second portion of the cloth member 546b It is possible to suppress the portion 546b4 from sliding with respect to one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

Further, as described above, by forming creases on the cloth member 546b, the elastic member 546a can be elastically deformed to form the constricted portion 546c in the conductive member 546, so that the elastic member 546a can be held in an elastically deformed state. can. Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the elastic member 546a can be increased in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other (vertical direction in FIG. 163(a)). As a result, the elastic member 546a can be easily held between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545.

Further, the cloth member 546b is bonded at its contact surface with the elastic member 546a, and its both ends are bonded together. As described above, since the elastic member 546a is formed from a sponge body, the adhesion area of the cloth member 546b becomes smaller due to the bubbles created when the sponge body is formed. Therefore, the cloth member 546b is easily peeled off from the four sides of the elastic member 546a. When the cloth member 546b is peeled off from the four sides of the elastic member 546a, it becomes difficult to maintain the contact state between the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 546, and static electricity accumulated in the liquid crystal device 523, which will be described later, is removed from the ground portion 545c (protrusion) of the substrate member 545. 545a1), there was a risk that it would be difficult to escape.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, both ends of the cloth member 546b are bonded together, so that the area of the bonding surface of the cloth member 546b can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cloth member 546b from peeling off from the four sides of the elastic member 546a.

Further, the cloth member 546b has adhesive surfaces at both ends disposed in one constriction 546c of the conductive member 546 (that is, adhesive surfaces between the ends of the cloth member 546b are arranged on one of the pair of third portions 546b5). is formed). Thereby, a contact area between the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 can be secured.

That is, when the ends of the cloth member 546b are bonded together, the ends are overlapped and a step is formed, so the adhesive surfaces of both ends are used as the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546 with the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545. When the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 come into contact with each other, the area of contact between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 is reduced by the difference in level.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the cloth member 546b is formed into an endless strip by connecting one end of the strip and the other end, and the connecting portion where the one end of the strip and the other end are connected is on one side of the liquid crystal device 543. (back surface portion 543c) or the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545, the connecting portion becomes a step, and one side of the liquid crystal device 543 or the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 It is possible to prevent the contact state from becoming unstable. That is, a contact area can be secured, and accordingly, sliding of the cloth member 546b against the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 can be suppressed, and electric charges can be easily removed.

In addition, when the conductive member 546 is not assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, the distance dimension between the opposing outer circumferential surfaces of the pair of left and right constricted portions 546c (the dimension L13 between the opposing outer circumferential portions of the pair of third portions 546b5 (see FIG. 163(a))) is made larger than the longitudinal dimension of the opening 544a of the intervening member 544.

Accordingly, when the conductive member 546 is inserted into the opening 544a of the intervening member 544, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546 can be elastically deformed, making it easier to assemble the liquid crystal display device 523.

That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 includes a plate-shaped intervening member 544 that is interposed between one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and has an opening 544a formed therein. Since the longitudinal size of the opening 544a of the intervening member 544 is made smaller than the longitudinal size of the conductive member 546 in the no-load state, the opening 544a of the intervening member 544 is provided on both sides of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction. The two sides can be sandwiched.

Therefore, the assembly work can be performed while holding the conductive member 546 on the intervening member 544, and the positioning with respect to the conductive member 546 can be performed as the intervening member 544 is disposed. It is possible to improve workability.

When the conductive member 546 is assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, the constricted portion 546c is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the opening 544a, and the two longitudinal ends of the conductive member 546 are not sandwiched between the opening 544a. Further, the conductive member 546 is interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, and is only inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the opening 544a, and is not fixed with screws or the like. It is difficult to hold the conductive member 546 during assembly. Therefore, it was necessary to carefully assemble the liquid crystal display device 523.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the conductive member 546 can be held by sandwiching the two longitudinal ends of the conductive member 546 between the openings 544a, which simplifies the assembly of the liquid crystal display device 523. can be done. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 523 and the substrate member 545, it is compressed and the elastic member 546a is deformed inward by the foamed air bubbles. As a result, the state of being pinched by the opening 544a can be released.

Further, as described above, the four openings 544a are arranged so that when the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 faces the player side (the state shown in FIGS. 7 and 11), the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 face each other. It is placed biased towards the side that is used. Therefore, the conductive member 546 disposed inside the opening 544a is also biased toward the opposite side of the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 when the liquid crystal display 543a is facing the player.

Here, when the opposing liquid crystal display devices 523 are collided (combined) at the center of the back case 300 with the liquid crystal displays 543a facing the player side (see FIG. 7), the two liquid crystal displays 543a are In order to make it easier for the player to view them as one display screen, it is necessary to bring the liquid crystal display devices 523 close to each other.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 has an outer edge that cannot display liquid crystal, in order for the player to view the two liquid crystal displays 543a as one display surface, It is necessary to arrange the two liquid crystal devices 523 without any gap.

Therefore, in order to move the two liquid crystal display devices 523 closer together, the two liquid crystal display devices 523 tend to collide. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, etc. disposed inside the liquid crystal display device 523 are likely to shake. Therefore, there was a risk that the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 inside the liquid crystal display device 523 would collide with other members.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the opening 544a faces the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 toward the player, the conductive member 546 is disposed biased on the opposite side. Shaking inside the liquid crystal device 523 that occurs when the liquid crystal display device 523 collides can be easily suppressed.

That is, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, since the kinetic energy of the colliding side is high, the colliding side of the liquid crystal device 543, the intervening member 544, and the substrate member 545 disposed inside the liquid crystal display device 523 is Easy to shake. Therefore, when the substrate member 543, the intervening member 544, and the substrate member 545 swing, the substrate member 545 collides with another member (for example, the intervening member 544), causing a short circuit in the wiring, or the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal device 543. etc. may be damaged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, a conductive layer is provided on the side where the liquid crystal device 543, the intervening member 544, and the substrate member 545 arranged inside the liquid crystal display device 523 are likely to swing. Since the member 546 is arranged, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, it is possible to easily suppress the liquid crystal device 543, the intervening member 544, and the substrate member 545 from swinging due to the elastic force of the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546. . As a result, damage to the liquid crystal device 543, the intervening member 544, and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

Next, the first region 545a of the substrate member 545 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 164. 164(a) is a front view of the substrate member 545, and FIG. 164(b) is a sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along the line CLXIVb-CLXIVb in FIG. 164(a). Note that in FIG. 164, the first region 545a is illustrated by a broken line. Further, in FIG. 164(a), the wiring 545g is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 164, the substrate member 545 includes a plate member 545c formed into a plate shape from a non-conductive resin material, and a conductive metal material disposed on one side of the plate member 545c. The ground portion 545d is disposed to cover one side of the ground portion 545d and the plate member 545c, and a covering member 545e is formed from a non-conductive resin material. .

The plate member 545c is a plate material that forms the skeleton of the substrate member 545, and is formed into a rectangular shape when the substrate member 545 is viewed from the front.

The ground portion 545d is a conductor that conducts electricity to the control components placed on the board member 545. Note that the ground portion 545d in this embodiment is formed over the entire first region 545a. Further, the substrate member 545 is provided with wiring 545g that is disposed between the covering member 545e and the plate member 545c and connected to each ground portion 545.

The wiring 545g is formed from a metal material and is connected to a connector 545f disposed on the board member 545. Further, the wiring 545g is connected (conducted) to the ground (not shown) of the pachinko machine 10 via the connector 545f. Therefore, the electricity input to the ground portion 545d can be released to the ground of the pachinko machine 10 via the wiring 545g.

The covering member 545e is disposed to cover the entire surface of the ground portion 545d and the plate member 545c. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the electricity that conducts between the ground portion 545d and the wiring 545g from discharging to other members (such as a chip disposed on the base member 545).

Further, the covering member 545e is not formed around the protrusion 545a1 provided on the substrate member 545, but is spaced apart from the protrusion 545a1 by a predetermined distance. In this case, a protrusion 545a1, which will be described later, protrudes beyond the covering member 545e. Thereby, contact (connection) between the conductive member 546 and the ground portion 545d can be ensured (see FIG. 164(b)).

Note that the above-described plate member 545c, ground portion 545d, and covering member 545e are illustrated only in FIG. 164(b), and illustration in other figures is omitted.

The first region 545a mainly includes a plurality of protrusions 545a1 that protrude toward the liquid crystal device 543 and a plurality of through holes 545a2 that penetrate circularly in the thickness direction of the substrate member 545 (left-right direction in FIG. 164(b)). be prepared and formed.

A plurality of through holes 545a2 are formed in the first region 545a so as to be lined up in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction of the substrate member 545. In this embodiment, five pieces are lined up in the longitudinal direction of the board member 545 and four pieces are lined up in the width direction of the board member 545.

Note that protrusions 545a2, which will be described later, are fitted into the through holes 545a2 at every other location in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction of the substrate member 545. Therefore, in this embodiment, the through holes 545a2 that penetrate in the plate thickness direction (the protrusions 545a1 are not fitted) are formed at three locations in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 and at two locations in the transverse direction. .

The protrusion 545a1 is formed of solder soldered to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545. That is, the projection 545a1 is placed in the through hole 545a2 by soldering to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

Therefore, the protrusion 545a1 can be formed in the process of soldering the electronic component to the board member 545. Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate process for forming the protrusion 545a1, and the process can be used in combination, so that the number of man-hours can be suppressed and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, by forming the protrusion 545a1 with solder soldered to the ground portion 545d, a contact area between the cloth member 546b and the ground portion 545d can be secured, and when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged, the substrate Charges can be easily removed via the ground portion 545d of the member 545.

The protrusion 545a1 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 545a2. Further, the protrusion 545a1 is disposed so as to be fitted inside the through hole 545a2, and the outer diameter of the tip on the liquid crystal device 543 side is formed to bulge in the radial direction, so that the protrusion 545a1 protrudes from the through hole 545a2. It is said that

As a result, the protrusion 545a1 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 can be connected (in contact with each other), so that the electricity conducted to the protrusion 545a1 can be transferred via the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 and the wiring 545g. It can be released to the ground of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the protrusion 545a1 has a radially swollen distal end portion that contacts the liquid crystal device 543 side of the ground portion 545d, and an outer circumferential surface of the proximal end portion that contacts the inner edge portion of the through hole 545a that penetrates the ground portion 545d. Since the protrusion 545a1 and the ground portion 545d are in contact with each other, a contact area between the protrusion 545a1 and the ground portion 545d can be secured. As a result, static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be easily released to the substrate member 545.

In addition, the cloth member 546b can be made to follow the shape of the protrusion 545a1, and accordingly, the cloth member 546b can slide against one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545. can be suppressed.

That is, since the tip of the protrusion 545a1 protrudes from the substrate member 545, the protrusion 545a1 can be disposed so as to bite into the side surface of the conductive member 546. Therefore, the conductive member 546 can be made difficult to shift in a direction (shear direction) parallel to the front side of the substrate member 545 (left side surface in FIG. 164(b)). As a result, static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be easily released to the substrate member 545.

The protrusions 545a1 are arranged at intervals at every other location with respect to the through holes 545a2 formed in a line. That is, the protrusions 545a1 are arranged in a staggered manner with respect to the through holes 545a2.

Therefore, by using the plurality of protrusions 545a1, it is possible to suppress the cloth member 546b from sliding with respect to the substrate member 545, and it is also possible to easily remove the electric charge charged on the liquid crystal device 543, and by using the through hole 545a2. Therefore, heat generated between the protrusion and the cloth member 546b can be efficiently dissipated.

That is, in the conductive member 546, since static electricity flows through the cloth member 546b, heat is likely to be accumulated due to the electricity, and although the substrate member 545 may be damaged due to the heat, the heat is easily discharged through the through hole 545a2. Therefore, it is possible to cool the conductive member 546 and prevent the substrate member 545 from breaking.

Next, the arrangement of the conductive member 546 will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. FIG. 165 is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523. 166(a) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 taken along the line CLXVIa-CLXVIa in FIG. 165, and FIG. 166(b) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. FIG. 166(c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the range LXVIIIc of FIG. 166(b).

Note that FIG. 165 shows a state in which the back case 542 and the board member 545 of the liquid crystal display device 523 are removed, and FIGS. 166(a) to 166(c) show the state in which the back case 542 and the board member 545 are attached. The state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the conductive member 546 is in a state in which the front side (first portion 546b3 side (to be described later) (upper side in FIG. 166(b))) is in contact with the back side 543c of the liquid crystal device 543, The back side (second portion 546b4 side (lower side in FIG. 166(b)) to be described later) is in contact with the first region 545a (see FIG. 164(a)) of the substrate member 545, and the elastic member 546a is in contact with the liquid crystal The device 543 and the substrate member 545 are arranged in a compressed state in opposing directions.

That is, when the conductive member 546 is not disposed on the liquid crystal display device 523, the distance L4 in the opposing direction between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 (see FIG. The distance L5 between the opposing substrate member 545 is set larger than the distance L5. Therefore, when the substrate member 545 is assembled to the liquid crystal device 543, the conductive member 546 can be compressed in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the elastic recovery force of the conductive member 546 in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other (left and right direction in FIG. 166(b)). The conductive member 546 can be brought into contact with the conductive member 546, and the contact state can be easily maintained.

Further, since the conductive member 546 is formed with a constricted portion 546c and the elastic member 546a is made of a compressible material, the conductive member 546 is compressed (smaller) in the direction facing the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. ), the compression force can be applied to the folded portion of the cloth member 546b of the constricted portion 546c, and the constricted portion 546c can be folded inside the conductive member 546.

As a result, as described above, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled (when the conductive member 546 is interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other), two of the longitudinal ends of the conductive member 546 The state of being sandwiched between the surface and the opening 544a of the intervening member 544 can be eliminated.

To explain in detail, in a configuration in which the conductive member 546 is made smaller than the size in the no-load state and the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the opening 544a of the intervening member 544, shearing deformation of the elastic member 546a is inhibited, so that the liquid crystal device When the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in a direction perpendicular to the facing direction, the cloth member 546b may slide against the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the elastic member 546a is formed of a compressible elastic member 546a, and when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the opening of the intervening member 544 is Since a gap is formed between the inner edge of the conductive member 544a and the outer surface of the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 546 other than the first portion 546b3 and second portion 546b4 sides, the conductive member 546 (elastic member 546a) is attached to the inner edge of the opening 544a. You can prevent yourself from being restrained. That is, during assembly work, the conductive member 546 is held in the intervening member 544 (opening 544a), and while the workability of the assembly work is improved, the conductive member 546 is held in the assembled state (between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545). 546 is clamped), the elastic member 546a can be easily sheared and deformed, and the cloth member 546b can be prevented from sliding against the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545.

The first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b come into contact with the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (protrusion 545a1) of the substrate member 545, so that a contact area can be secured. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged, the charge can be easily removed via the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

Further, the outer surface of both longitudinal ends of the elastic member 546a (on the third portion 546b5 side of the cloth member 546b) on the side sandwiched by the opening 544a of the intervening member 544 is constricted (concave) inward. Since the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the outer surface of the elastic member 546a is connected to the intervening member 544 starting from the inwardly constricted portion 546c. It can be easily deformed in a direction away from the inner edge of the opening 544a (inward of the elastic member 546a). As a result, a gap can be reliably formed between the inner edge of the opening 544a of the intervening member 544 and the outer surface of the conductive member 546.

Further, the conductive member 546 is formed into an endless band shape by connecting one end of the band shape and the other end thereof, and an elastic member 546a is fitted inside the cloth member 546b, so that one end of the band shape and the other end of the conductive member 546 are connected. Since the connection portion connecting the two is disposed on the inwardly recessed outer surface side of the elastic member 546a (the third portion 546b5 side of the cloth member 546b), the connection portion is formed by the inwardly recessed portion. A connecting portion connecting one end and the other end of the strip can be accommodated in the space provided. Therefore, the connecting portion connecting one end and the other end of the band shape can be made difficult to come into contact with the inner edge of the opening 544a of the intervening member 544. As a result, the deformability of the conductive member 546 can be ensured.

That is, on the bonded surfaces between the ends of the cloth member 546b, the bonded portion of the cloth member 546 is difficult to be plastically deformed due to the adhesion of the adhesive. In this embodiment, since the adhesion position is different from the fold position of the cloth member 546b, when the conductive member 546b is compressed in the direction in which the liquid phase device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other, the cloth member The fold position of 546b can be folded.

Furthermore, since the bonded portion is less likely to be plastically deformed, in the process of compressing the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546, the elastic recovery force of the elastic member 546a increases, thereby suppressing plastic deformation of the cloth member 546b. As a result, the constricted portion 546c can be easily folded inside the conductive member 546.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 166(c), by disposing the protrusion 545a1 in a state protruding from the substrate member 545 (coating member 545e), it is possible to prevent the conductive member 546 from coming into contact with the opening edge of the through hole 545a2. It can be suppressed. That is, since a space can be formed between the substrate member 545 (through-hole 545a2) and the conductive member 546 by lifting the conductive member 546 with the protrusion 545a1, it is possible to prevent the through-hole 545a2 from being blocked by the conductive member 546.

This allows outside air to flow into the space between the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 546 through the through hole 545a, or allows air in the space between the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 546 to flow out from the through hole ka545a. be able to. That is, by ensuring (increasing) an air circulation path, it is possible to easily cool the conductive member 546 and the substrate member 545. As a result, damage to the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, a case where the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 changes will be described. 167(a) to FIG. 167(c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Note that FIGS. 167(a) to 167(c) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166(b). Further, while FIG. 167(b) is a normal state (reference position), FIGS. 167(a) and 167(c) each illustrate a state in which the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 has changed.

Here, as described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed so as to be displaceable (rotation around the rotation axis 523c and sliding displacement as the slide rail 510 expands and contracts) (FIGS. 7 to 14). reference). Therefore, the positional relationship of each component inside the liquid crystal display device 523 may change due to the inertial force of the displacement. In this case, if the distance between the opposing sides of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 changes, the contact state of the conductive member 546 interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be released. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 167, the conductive member 546 is formed from a cloth member 546b and an elastic member 546a, so that the elastic member 546a is elastically deformed, thereby connecting the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal. The state of contact between the device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be easily maintained.

To explain in detail, as shown in FIG. 167(a), when the opposing sides of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are close to each other and the distance dimension L6 is smaller than the distance dimension L5, the distance dimension L6 is adjusted to the distance dimension L6. The elastic member 546a is compressed in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other (in the vertical direction in FIG. 167(a)), thereby maintaining the state of contact between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. can.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167(c), the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are spaced apart from each other, and the distance dimension is larger than the distance dimension L5 and smaller than the dimension L4 of the conductive member 546 (see FIG. 163). In the case of L7, the elastic member 546a is arranged in a compressed state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, so that the elastic member 546a is arranged in a compressed state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. By elastically deforming the conductive member 543 and the substrate member 545 in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167(c)), the contact state between the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 can be maintained.

That is, between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, a conductive member 546 that can be elastically deformed in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167(b)) is disposed, so that the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 When the distance between the opposing sides changes, it is possible to easily maintain the contact state between the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, a case where the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 change in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described. 168(a) to FIG. 168(c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Note that FIGS. 168(a) to 168(c) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166(a). Furthermore, assuming that FIG. 168(b) is the normal (reference position), in FIG. 168(a), the liquid crystal device 543 is positioned on one longitudinal side of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 (the right side in FIG. 168(a)). FIG. 168(c) shows a state in which the liquid crystal device 543 has changed to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 (left side in FIG. 168(c)).

In addition, in FIGS. 168(a) to 168(c), a virtual line KJ1 is located at the center position of the first region 545a in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545, and a first portion 546b3 of the cloth member 546b (see FIG. 163(a) ) A virtual line KJ2 is shown as a two-dot chain line at the center position in the longitudinal direction.

Here, conventionally, an electric device (liquid crystal device 543), a substrate (substrate member 545) having a ground portion (ground portion 545d) that is disposed opposite to one side of the electric device and connected to earth, and the substrate A gaming machine is known that includes a connecting means (conductive member 546 in this embodiment) for electrically connecting an electric device to a ground portion of the game machine. Specifically, the electric device is formed as a liquid crystal display device in which a shield member (back surface portion 543c) made of a metal plate is provided on the back surface of a liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal display 543a). In addition, in the conventional product, the connecting means is formed as an arcuate leaf spring, and the base end is in contact with the ground portion of the board (electrically connected), and the convex surface of the arc is in contact with the shield member (electrically connected). connected to). The base end of the connecting means is fixed to the substrate, while the arcuate convex surface is pressed against the shield member, and the contact is maintained by elastic deformation of the leaf spring. Thereby, static electricity generated in the shield member can be released to the ground via the ground portion of the board. Therefore, for example, even if the shield member is charged due to static electricity generated due to the rolling of game balls or the displacement of the liquid crystal display device, the electric charge is removed through the ground part of the board and the problem such as color unevenness or missing dots on the liquid crystal display is eliminated. The occurrence of defects can be suppressed.

However, with the above-mentioned conventional technology, when the electric device is displaced, or when the electric device is vibrated due to the input of external force due to the displacement of other performance members or the rolling/collision of the game ball, the shield is damaged. When the member and the board are relatively displaced in a direction perpendicular to the opposing direction, the arcuate convex surface of the connecting means slides against the shielding member, causing wear of the connecting means or the object of contact of the connecting means. there were.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the one surface (back surface portion 543c) side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 or When the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in a direction perpendicular to the facing direction, shear deformation occurs due to the relative displacement (a direction perpendicular to the facing direction between the first portion 546b3 side and the second portion 546b4 side of the cloth member 546b). (The conductive member 546 is deformed in the longitudinal direction of the conductive member 546). 545a1) can be maintained in contact with each other. That is, by shearing and deforming the conductive member 546, it is possible to prevent the first portion 546b3 or the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 546 from sliding (displacement) with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545. As a result, it is possible to suppress the conductive member 546 or the object to which the conductive member 546 comes into contact (the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545) from being worn out.

In addition, since the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the opposing rear surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (protrusion 545a1) of the substrate member 545, the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the opposing surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 during assembly. It is only necessary to sandwich the conductive member 546 between the two, and work such as fastening is not necessary. As a result, workability can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

That is, as shown in FIG. 168, when the liquid crystal device 543 changes in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 168(b)) with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546 changes. By elastically deforming, it is possible to suppress displacement of the contact surface.

To explain in detail, as shown in FIG. 168(a), the liquid crystal device 543 changes to one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (to the right side in FIG. 168(a)) with respect to the substrate member 545 (with respect to the virtual line KJ1). When the virtual line KJ2 changes to one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the bending angle of the crease formed in the third portion 546b5 is made shallow (obtuse angle), and the bending angle is changed to the first portion 546b3 side. The elastic member 546a is displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction.

In this case, as described above, the first portion 546b3 of the cloth member 546b is folded inside the conductive member 546, so that the elastic member 546a can be elastically recovered in the direction facing the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. Since the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b are easily formed, the positions of the contact surfaces between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be prevented from shifting. As a result, it is possible to suppress the conductive member 546 or the object to which the conductive member 546 comes into contact (the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545) from being worn out.

Here, the liquid crystal display device 523 of this embodiment is configured to be rotatable by 90 degrees around the axis of the base member 400, as described above. In this case, when the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is changed from parallel to the horizontal direction to parallel to the direction of gravity, the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 disposed inside the liquid crystal display device 523 are As the holding direction of the liquid crystal device 543 changes, the holding portions of the intervening member 544 and the substrate member 545 with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 are changed to the protrusion 541f and the through hole 544c on one longitudinal side (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the front case 541. (see FIG. 161), the interposition member 544 and the substrate member 545 are likely to be displaced in the direction of gravity with respect to the liquid crystal device 543.

Therefore, the contact surfaces between the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are likely to be misaligned. Therefore, if the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are misaligned, there is a risk that the contact objects will be worn out.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 546 is arranged such that the opening direction of the endless strip is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, the deformability of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be improved.

Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees around the axis of the base member 400, and from a state where its longitudinal direction is parallel to the horizontal direction (see FIG. 7), to a state where its longitudinal direction is parallel to the direction of gravity. When the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced to the fixed state (see FIG. 11), the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 can be prevented from being misaligned. As a result, when the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are misaligned, it is possible to suppress the abrasion of the contact objects.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 of this embodiment is supported at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and is configured to be slidable in the lateral direction by the slide unit SL (see FIGS. 7 to 14). In this case, the liquid crystal display device 523 is connected to one longitudinal end thereof with a drive means (drive motor 431) for enabling sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and displaced, static electricity generated by driving the drive motor 431 is easily transmitted from one side of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the longitudinal direction.

In contrast, in the liquid crystal display device 523 according to the present embodiment, the opening 544a of the intervening member 544 is formed (arranged) so as to be biased towards one end in the longitudinal direction of the intervening member 544. Therefore, the conductive member 546 disposed in the opening 544a is biased toward one end of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is slid in the transverse direction, the static electricity transmitted from the driving means (drive motor 431) to the liquid crystal device 543 is transmitted to the other longitudinal side of the liquid crystal device 543. The signal is transmitted to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 by the conductive member 546. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of static electricity in the liquid crystal device 543 due to sliding displacement. As a result, the occurrence of defects such as uneven color and missing dots in the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal device 523 can be easily suppressed.

Note that when the liquid crystal device 543 is moved to the left with respect to the substrate member 545 as shown in FIG. 168(c), the liquid crystal device 543 is moved to the left as shown in FIG. Since this is only the opposite of the case where the change is made to the right with respect to the member 545 (rightward in FIG. 168(c)), a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, a conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170. In the thirteenth embodiment, the cloth member 546b is formed with a constant width around the elastic member 546a, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the cloth member 14546b is formed with different widths. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

169(a) is a top view of the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 169(b) is a side view of the conductive member 14546 as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXIXb in FIG. 169(a). (c) is a side view of the conductive member 14546 as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXIXc in FIG. 169. 170(a) to FIG. 170(c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Note that FIGS. 170(a) to 170(c) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166(a). In addition, in FIGS. 170(a) to 170(c), FIG. 170(b) is set as the normal (reference) position, and in FIG. In FIG. 170(c), the state in which the liquid crystal device 543 has changed to one side in the lateral direction (lower side in FIG. 170(a)) is shown in FIG. 170(c) (upper side) respectively. Furthermore, in FIG. 170, the notches 14546b1 and 14546b2 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the cloth member 14546b of the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment has a third portion 14546b5 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 169(a)) on the short side of the liquid crystal display device 523. A notch 14546b1 is cut out from the end face of the other direction side (the right side in FIG. 169(b)) toward one side in the transverse direction (the left side in FIG. 169(b)) of the liquid crystal display device 523, and 169(a) right side) from the end surface of one side in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (right side in FIG. 169(c)) to the other side in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (FIG. 169(c)) A cutout portion 14546b2 is formed toward the left side).

The cutout portion 14546b1 is formed at a substantially intermediate position between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 169(a)), and the width of the cloth member 14546b in the opening direction It is set to approximately one third of the width dimension of the cloth member 14546b in the opening direction. Furthermore, the notch dimension in the opposing direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 169(b)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the notch portion 14546b1 is the dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opposing direction. is set larger than half of

The notch 14546b2 is formed at a substantially intermediate position between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 169(a)), and the width of the cloth member 14546b in the opening direction is It is set to approximately one third of the width dimension in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b of No. 14546. Furthermore, the notch dimension in the opposing direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 169(c)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the notch portion 14546b2 is the dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opposing direction. is set larger than half of

That is, the cutout portion 14546b1 and the cutout portion 14546b2 are formed at substantially the same position in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, and at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other in the longitudinal direction of the conductive member 14546. state. Thereby, each side surface of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 can be easily sheared and displaced in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 14546 is elastically deformed, so that the conductive member 14546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 It is possible to suppress displacement of the abutting surface.

To explain in detail, if the cloth member 14546b is formed into an endless shape by disposing the cloth member 14546b on four sides other than the two opposing sides of the elastic member 546a, the elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b is caused. Because it is obstructed by the cloth member 14546b, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are mutually displaced in the direction in which the cloth member 14546b opens, the contact surfaces of the conductive member 14546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are misaligned. There was a fear that it would happen.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170(a) or FIG. 170(b), the notch 14546b1 and the notch 14546b2 are formed in the third portion 14546b5, so that the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b is The rigidity can be lowered. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in the direction in which the cloth member 14546b opens, the elastic member 546a (conductive member 14546) is moved between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 at the intermediate portion in the opposing direction. It can be transformed.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the contact surfaces between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 14546. As a result, abrasion of the contact surface between the substrate member 545 or the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 14546 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, the engagement part 544b is formed at one longitudinal end of the intervening member 545, and is inserted into the recessed part 541c1 formed in the front case 541. Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 is configured to be rotatable by 90 degrees around the axis of the base member 400. When the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is parallel to the direction of gravity, the other end of the liquid crystal display device 523 is located on the upper side in the direction of gravity, and one end of the liquid crystal display device 523 is located on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Therefore, one end in the longitudinal direction of the interposed member 544 only engages with the engaging portion 544b, so that it engages with the interposed member 544 and the interposed member 544 as the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated. The substrate member 545 is likely to be misaligned in the lateral direction with respect to the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, there is a possibility that the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 may be misaligned, and the objects to be contacted may be worn out.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the conductive member 546 is formed with the notch 14546b1 and the notch 14546b2, so that the conductive member 546 can be easily sheared and deformed in the direction in which the cloth member 546b opens. That is, the interposed member 544 can be easily sheared and deformed in the lateral direction. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are misaligned in the lateral direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 546 can be sheared and deformed. As a result, the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 can be prevented from being misaligned, and the objects to be contacted can be prevented from being worn out.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 171. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the conductive member 546 is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped, but in the fifteenth embodiment, a through hole 15546d is formed in the conductive member 15546 in the longitudinal direction. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

171(a) is a top view of the conductive member 15546 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 171(b) is a side view of the conductive member 15546 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCLXIXb in FIG. 171(a).

As shown in FIG. 171, the conductive member 15546 of the fifteenth embodiment is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped with one end long, and a through hole 15546d passing through the conductive member 15546 in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 171(a)) is formed. Note that the through hole 15546d is formed to penetrate the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a.

The through hole 15546d is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in side view parallel to or perpendicular to the first portion 546b3 (top surface in FIG. 171(a)) of the conductive member 15546. Furthermore, the through hole 15546d is formed at the center of the elastic member 546a when viewed from above.

Further, in this embodiment, the distance dimension in the opposing direction between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the through hole 15546d is half the distance dimension in the opposing direction between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 15546. At the same time, the distance between the pair of third portions 546b5 of the through hole 15546d in the opposing direction is set to half the distance between the pair of third portions 546b5 of the conductive member 15546 in the opposing direction.

When the liquid crystal device 543 is vertically displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 due to the through hole 15546d, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 15546 is elastically deformed, and the connection between the conductive member 15546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 is Misalignment of the contact surface can be suppressed.

To explain in detail, by forming the through hole 15546d in the conductive member 15546, the rigidity of the conductive member 15546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b can be lowered. Therefore, the conductive member 15546 can be easily sheared and deformed in the direction in which the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 face each other.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced relative to the substrate member 545 in one of the opposing directions of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, the elastic member 546a is sheared and deformed, and the conductive member 15546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact surface with the substrate member 545 can be prevented from being displaced. As a result, damage to the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, or the conductive member 15546 due to rubbing of the contact surfaces between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 15546 can be suppressed.

In addition, first recesses 15546d1 recessed in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b are provided at both ends of the upper and lower inner surfaces of the through hole 15546d in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b, over the entire area in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5. It is formed over a period of time. Further, the conductive member 15546 includes a second recess 15546d2 recessed at a position facing the first recess 15546d1. That is, the first recess 15546d1 and the second recess 15546d2 are formed at positions facing each other and recessed in the opposite direction.

When the conductive member 15546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the first recessed portion 15546d1 and the second recessed portion 15546d2 are compressed and held by the elastic member 546a, so that the inside of the recessed portion is collapsed. It is said to be in a state of being

Here, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced relative to the substrate member 545 in one of the opposing directions of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, the upper and lower side surfaces of the conductive member 15546 (elastic member 546a) expand. and transform. Therefore, along with the deformation, the conductive member 15546 is drawn into the side between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. Therefore, the area where the conductive member 15546 contacts the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be reduced.

In contrast, in this embodiment, since the first recess 15546d1 and the second recess 15546d2 are formed, when the end surface of the conductive member 15546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is stretched and deformed, the first recess 15546d1 and the second recess 15546d1 and the second recess 15546d2 are formed. The concave surface of the second concave portion 15546d2 can be expanded. Thereby, the conductive member 15546 can be prevented from being drawn into the side between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. As a result, the contact area between the conductive member 15546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 can be prevented from being reduced.

Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 172. In the thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the conductive member 15546 is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the conductive member 16546 is provided with a recessed portion 16546e. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

172(a) is a top view of the conductive member 16546 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 172(b) is a side view of the conductive member 16546 as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIIb in FIG. 172(a).

As shown in FIG. 172, in the conductive member 16546 of the sixteenth embodiment, a recessed portion 16546e is formed in the end surface of the cloth member 546b in the opening direction (left and right in FIG. 172(b)). That is, the recessed portion 16546e is formed by partially cutting out the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a.

The recessed portions 16546e are recessed in the upper surface side (the left side in FIG. 172(b)) and the lower surface (the right side in FIG. 172(c)) of the conductive member 16546, and are recessed in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5. It is formed over the entire area. Further, the recessed portion 16546e is formed at the center of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 172(a)).

Further, in the present embodiment, the distance dimension in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 172(a)) between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the recessed portion 16546e is the same as that between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion of the conductive member 16546. 546b4 in the opposing direction, and the depth dimension of one recessed portion 16546e (left-right dimension in FIG. 172) is set to half the distance dimension in the opposing direction of the conductive member 16546 (FIG. b) The size is set to one-third of the distance dimension in the left-right direction).

When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced relative to the substrate member 545 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b due to the recessed portion 16546e, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 16546 is elastically deformed, so that the conductive member 16546 and the liquid crystal device 543 Also, it is possible to suppress displacement of the contact surface with the substrate member 545.

To explain in detail, by forming the recessed portion 16546e in the conductive member 16546, the rigidity of the conductive member 16546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b can be lowered. Therefore, the conductive member 15546 can be easily sheared and deformed from an intermediate position in the opposing direction between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4.

Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to either side of the opening of the cloth member 546b with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is deformed and the conductive member 16546 comes into contact with the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. It is possible to suppress displacement of the surface. As a result, damage to the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, or the conductive member 546 due to rubbing of the contact surfaces of the conductive member 16546 with the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, a pair of third recesses 16546e1 are provided at the ends of the opening direction of the cloth member 546b on the side surfaces where the two recesses 16546e are opposed, respectively, and are recessed in the direction opposite to the pair of third portions 546b5. The third portion 546b5 is formed over the entire area in the opposing direction.

When the conductive member 16546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the third recess 16546e1 is compressed and held by the elastic member 546a, so that the inside of the third recess 16546e1 is crushed. Ru.

Here, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced relative to the substrate member 545 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b, the elastic member 546a located between the opposing recessed portions 16546e is displaced in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. The end face stretches and deforms. Therefore, along with the deformation, the conductive member 16546 is drawn between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. Therefore. There was a risk that the area where the conductive member 16546 contacts the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 would be reduced.

In contrast, in this embodiment, since the third recess 16546e1 is formed, when the end surface of the elastic member 546a located between the opposing recesses 16546e in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is stretched and deformed, the third recess 16546e1 is formed. The concave surface of the third concave portion 16546e1 is expanded. Thereby, the conductive member 16546 can be prevented from being drawn into the side between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 facing each other. As a result, the contact area between the conductive member 16546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 can be prevented from being reduced.

Next, the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175. In the thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the conductive member 546 is formed into a cube, but in the seventeenth embodiment, the conductive member 17546 is formed in an irregular shape. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the conductive member 17546 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173(a) is a top view of the conductive member 17546 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 173(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 17546 along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 173(a).

As shown in FIG. 173, the conductive member 17546 has a first portion 17546b3 curved in an arc shape, a second portion 546b4 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a first portion 17546b3 and a second portion 546b4. A constricted portion 546c is formed at an intermediate position in the opposing direction of the portion 546b4 and is inclined toward the center side of the pair of third portions 546b5 in the opposing direction.

The conductive member 17546 is formed from an elastic member 17546a made of an elastic material on the inside, and a cloth member 546b disposed around the elastic member 17546a.

The elastic member 17546a is formed from a rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped with a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and a circular arc portion 17546a2 protruding in a semicircular arc shape from one side in the lateral direction of the rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1.

The length of the circular arc portion 17546a2 in the opposing direction (in the vertical direction in FIG. 173(a)) of the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion 546b4 is 3 the length of the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the elastic member 17546a in the opposing direction. The constricted portion 546c is formed in the arcuate portion 17546a2. Thereby, the elastic member 17546a can be easily elastically deformed from the constricted portion 546c in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 (left-right direction in FIG. 173(a)). Further, the conductive member 17546 is formed in a constant shape in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b.

Next, a state in which the elastic member 17546a is disposed in the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175.

174(a) and 174(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. 175(a) to FIG. 175(c) are schematic cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523.

Note that FIG. 174(a) corresponds to FIG. 166(a), FIG. 174(b) corresponds to FIG. 166(b), and FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c) correspond to FIG. 174(b). (This corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 166(b)). In addition, in FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c), FIG. 175(b) is set as the normal (reference) position, and in FIG. In FIG. 175(b), the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced toward the other end in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 175(a)), and the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced toward the one longitudinal end of the liquid crystal display device 523 relative to the substrate member 545 (FIG. 175(c)). The states in which they are displaced to the right side) are respectively illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 174, when the conductive member 17546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the side surface on the rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 side is in contact with the substrate member 545, and the arcuate portion A part of the side surface on the 17546a2 side is elastically deformed and brought into contact with the liquid crystal device 543 (see FIG. 174(b)).

Note that in FIGS. 174 and 175, the contact area of the liquid crystal device 532 that contacts the conductive member 17546 in the normal state (the state shown in FIG. 174(b)) is illustrated as a first contact area 17543d1, and the The contact region of the cloth member 546b that contacts the first contact region 17543d1 is illustrated as a first deformation region NR1.

Furthermore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced toward the other longitudinal end of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 (the left side in FIG. 175(a)), the conductive member 17543 The contact area of the liquid crystal device 532 that comes into contact with the liquid crystal device 532 is shown as a second contact area 17543d2, and the contact area of the cloth member 546b that comes into contact with the second contact area 17543d2 is shown as a second deformation area NR2.

Further, in a state where the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced toward one end in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (the right side in FIG. 175(c)) with respect to the substrate member 545, the conductive member 17546 contacts the conductive member 17546 in an area different from the first contact area 17543d1. The abutting area of the liquid crystal device 532 that abuts is illustrated as a third abutting area 17543d3, and the abutting area of the cloth member 546b that abuts the third abutting area 17543d3 is illustrated as a third deformation area NR3.

In addition, in FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c), an imaginary line KJ1 is illustrated as a two-dot chain line at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 in the first region 545a of the substrate member 545.

As shown in FIG. 174, in the seventeenth embodiment, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are disposed at the reference position, the first deformable region NR1 of the conductive member 17546 deforms, and the first deformable region NR1 of the liquid crystal device 543 deforms. 1 contact area 17543d1. On the other hand, the conductive member 17546 on the side of the rectangular portion 17546a1 is disposed in contact with the first region 545a of the substrate member 545, similarly to the thirteenth embodiment.

Therefore, since the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be connected by the conductive member 17546, the electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be released to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 175(a) to 175(c), when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, elastic By elastically deforming the member 17546a, each contact area and each deformation area can be brought into contact. This can prevent the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 from rubbing against the conductive member 17546. As a result, damage to the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 17546 due to rubbing can be suppressed.

To explain in detail, as shown in FIG. 175(a), when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the left with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is elastically deformed, so that the elastic member 546a is moved to the left. considered to be in a biased state. As a result, the left elastic member 546a is pushed out toward the liquid crystal device 543 and comes into contact with the liquid crystal device 543.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced toward the other longitudinal end of the liquid crystal device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 (left side in FIG. 175(a)), the second displacement region NR2 is By contacting the contact region 17543d2, the state of contact between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be maintained.

In other words, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced relative to the substrate member 545 toward the other end in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 (left side in FIG. 175(a)), the liquid crystal device 543 By bringing the second displacement region NR2 corresponding to the second contact region 17543d2 of the liquid crystal device 543 into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 from rubbing against the conductive member 17546. As a result, damage to the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 17546 due to rubbing can be suppressed.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are opposite to each other in the opposite direction and the liquid crystal device 543 is opposite to the substrate member 545 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 (the left-right direction in FIG. 175(b)). When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the direction, the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact surface of the conductive member 17546 can be separated from each other.

This can prevent static electricity from being conducted from the liquid crystal device 543 to the conductive member 17546 at the same position. Here, static electricity is conducted at locations with low resistance, so if the contact surfaces are at exactly the same position, static electricity is repeatedly conducted at locations with low resistance. Therefore, there is a risk that the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 may partially deteriorate in areas where static electricity is easily conductive.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by separating the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact surface of the conductive member 17546, the contact position of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member are adjusted due to the difference in expansion and contraction of the cloth member 546b. The contact position of 17546 can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical resistance from becoming small at the same position. Therefore, the portions where static electricity is easily conducted can be changed, so that it is possible to suppress partial deterioration of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 at the portions where static electricity is easily conducted. As a result, conductivity between the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 can be maintained.

Note that the state shown in FIG. 175(c) in which the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the right with respect to the substrate member 545 is opposite to the state in which the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the left with respect to the substrate member 545 described above Since the contact surface between the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 is only changed to the third contact area 17543d3 and the third deformation area, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176. In the seventeenth embodiment, a part of the conductive member 17546 is formed in an arc shape, but in the eighteenth embodiment, the conductive member 18546 is formed in a columnar shape.

176(a) is a top view of the conductive member 18546 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 176(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 18546 along the line CLXXVIb-CLXXVIb in FIG. 176(a).

As shown in FIG. 176, a conductive member 18546 in the eighteenth embodiment is formed in a columnar shape that is circular in top view. That is, the elastic member 18546a is formed into a cylindrical shape, and the cloth member 546b is wound (wrapped) around the outer peripheral surface of the elastic member 18546a. In this case, the diameter of the conductive member 18546 is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 163(a)) of the conductive member 546 in the thirteenth embodiment.

As a result, when the conductive member 18546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the conductive member 18546 slightly moves the elastic member 546a disposed inside toward the opposite direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. It is placed in a compressed state. In other words, the conductive member 18546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 while being elastically deformed into an elliptical shape when viewed from above.

Note that the cloth member 546b is adhered to the outer peripheral surface of the elastic member 18546a. Further, like the conductive member 546 in the thirteenth embodiment, the conductive member 18546 is disposed in the opening 544a of the intervening member 544 with the opening direction of the cloth member 546b facing the lateral direction of the liquid crystal device 543. .

When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the conductive member 18546 is rotationally displaced about its center. Thereby, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the state of contact between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be maintained.

That is, in the 18th embodiment, by rotating the conductive member 18546, it is possible to prevent conduction from occurring at the same position with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545, as in the 17th embodiment. That is, by rotating the conductive member 18546b, the contact position with the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact position with the substrate member 545 can be changed, thereby suppressing partial deterioration of the contact surface. As a result, conductivity between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 18546 can be maintained.

Furthermore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced (misaligned) with respect to the substrate member 545, the conductive member 18546 is rotationally displaced, so it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 from rubbing against the conductive member 18546. As a result, damage to the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 18546 due to rubbing can be suppressed.

Next, the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protrusions 545a1 of the first region 545a are arranged in a staggered manner has been described, but in the first region 19545a of the nineteenth embodiment, the protrusions 19545a1 are arranged at the outer edge of the first region 19545a. Ru.

177(a) is a front view of the substrate member 545 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177(a). 178(a) is a top view of the conductive member 19546, and FIG. 178(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 19546 along the line CLXXVIIIb-CLXXVIIIb in FIG. 178(a). 179(a) and 179(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the conductive member 19546.

Note that FIG. 179(a) corresponds to FIG. 166(a), and FIG. 179(b) corresponds to FIG. 166(b). Further, in FIG. 177(a), the first region 19545a and the second region 19545b are illustrated with broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 177 to 179, in the first region 19545a of the substrate member 545 in the nineteenth embodiment, the protrusion 545a1 is provided only in the through hole 545a2 located along the outer edge of the first region 19545a. In other words, the protrusion 545a1 is arranged along the outer edge of the first region 19545a.

The conductive member 19546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape and includes an elastic member 19546a made of an elastic material, and cloth members 546b disposed on four sides of the elastic member 19546a except for two opposing faces in one direction. be prepared and formed.

The elastic member 19546a is formed from a sponge-like member, and is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped when the cloth member 546b is not provided. Further, the elastic member 19546a is formed with recessed portions 19546a3 formed on four sides around the side surface on the substrate member 545 side (lower side in FIG. 178(a)). In other words, the elastic member 19546a includes a non-recessed notch portion 19546a4 in the center of the side surface on the substrate member 545 side.

That is, the other side of the elastic member 19546a has a recessed part 19546a3 (first region) facing the region of the substrate member 545 where the protrusion 545a1 protrudes, and a region of the substrate member 545 where the protrusion is not formed. The non-concave notch 19546a4 (second region) faces each other, and the non-concave notch 19546a4 (second region) protrudes to one side (substrate member 545 side) from the concave notch 19546a3 (first region). Therefore, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the elastic member 546a is compressed, it is possible to increase the surface pressure at the non-recessed notch 19546a4 (second region). can. As a result, it becomes difficult for the non-concave notch 19546a4 (second region) to get over the protrusion 545a1, so that sliding of the cloth member 546b with respect to the substrate member 545 can be suppressed accordingly. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the recessed notch 19546a3 (first region) can be lowered, it is possible to suppress shearing deformation of the elastic member 546a to that extent.

The non-concave notch 19546a4 has an outer shape that is larger than the approximately rectangular area inscribed in each protrusion 545a1 arranged around the first area 19545a (the area formed by the tangent line touching the inner circumferential side of each protrusion 545a1). In this embodiment, it is set to a size equivalent to that of the second region 19545b (that is, a size such that the outer edge is located between the protrusion 545a1 and the through hole 545a2). Further, the recessed dimension L8 (see FIG. 178(a)) along the opposing direction of the first portion 19546b3 and the second portion 19546b4 of the recessed notch 19546a3 is the protrusion dimension L9 of the protrusion 545a1 from the substrate member 545 (see FIG. 177). (see (b))) (L8>L9).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 179, when the conductive member 19546 is disposed on the liquid crystal display device 523, the cloth member 546b (second portion 19546b3) disposed in the non-concave notch 19546a4 comes into contact with the second region 19545b. It can be installed in the same position. Further, the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 are compressed when the elastic member 546a is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, and are disposed in the recessed part 19546a3. The entire area of the cloth member 546b (second portion 19546b3) can be brought into contact with each protrusion 545a1.

In this case, as described above, the recess dimension L8 is set larger than the protrusion dimension L9, so the compression rate of the non-recessed notch 19546a4 can be made larger than that of the recessed notch 19546a3.

Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the protrusions 545a1 are arranged in a staggered manner with respect to the first region 545a, the entire surface of the cloth member 546b (second portion 546b3) is supported substantially uniformly by the plurality of protrusions 545a1. Therefore, there was a possibility that the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 545a would decrease. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in a direction perpendicular to the plane where they face each other, there is a possibility that the contact surfaces between the cloth member 546b and the first region 545a may be displaced.

On the other hand, in the nineteenth embodiment, the compression rate of the non-recessed notch 19546a4 is made larger than that of the recessed notch 19546a3, and each protrusion 545a1 surrounds the non-recessed notch 19546a4. It is possible to prevent the position of the cutout 19546a4 from shifting unless it gets over the protrusion 545a1. That is, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 19545a can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in a direction perpendicular to the plane where they face each other, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the contact surfaces between the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545.

Next, the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. In the thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusions 545a1 of the first region 545a are arranged in a staggered manner, but in the first region 20545a of the twentieth embodiment, the protrusions 545a1 are arranged linearly in the first region 20545a. placed side by side.

180(a) is a front view of the substrate member 545 in the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 180(b) is a sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along the line CLXXXb-CLXXXb in FIG. 180(a). 181(a) is a top view of the conductive member 20546, and FIG. 181(b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 20546 along the line CLXXXIb-CLXXXIb in FIG. 181(a). 182(a) and 182(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the conductive member 20546, and FIG. 182(c) is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the conductive member 20546 in range CLXXXIIc in FIG. 182(b).

Note that FIG. 182(a) corresponds to FIG. 166(a), and FIG. 182(b) corresponds to FIG. 166(b). Further, in FIG. 180(a), the first region 20545a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 180 to 182, in the first region 20545a of the substrate member 545 in the twentieth embodiment, the protrusion 545a1 is approximately at the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 180(a)) of the substrate member 545 in the first region 20545a. They are arranged in a straight line in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 180(a)) of the substrate member 545.

The conductive member 20546 is formed into a cube shape and includes an elastic member 20546a made of an elastic material, and cloth members 546b disposed on four sides of the elastic member 20546a except for two opposing sides in one direction. be prepared and formed.

The elastic member 20546a is formed from a sponge-like member, and is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped when the cloth member 546b is not provided. Moreover, the elastic member 20546a is located at approximately the center of the side surface on the substrate member 545 side (lower side in FIG. 181(a)) (approximately at the center in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 (left-right direction in FIG. 181(a)) A recessed portion 20546a3 is formed along the opening direction of the cloth member 546b (left-right direction in FIG. 181(b)). As a result, non-recessed recesses 20546a4 are formed at two locations on the end surface (side surface) of the elastic member 20546a on the substrate member 545 side with the recessed recess 20546a3 in between.

In other words, the end surface of the elastic member 20546a on the second portion 546b4 side has a concave notch 20546a3 (first region) facing the region where the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 protrudes, and a recessed part 20546a3 (first region) where the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 protrudes. It includes a non-recessed notch 20546a4 (second region) that faces the non-formed region, and the non-recessed notch 20546a4 (second region) protrudes beyond the recessed notch 20546a3 (first region).

Therefore, in a state where the conductive member 20546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the elastic member 546a is compressed, the surface pressure at the non-recessed notch 20546a4 (second region) can be increased. As a result, by utilizing the protrusion 545a1 received in the recessed notch 20546a3 (first region), the cloth member 546b (second portion 20546b4) disposed in the non-recessed notch 20546a4 can be made difficult to climb over the protrusion 545a1. Accordingly, sliding of the cloth member 546b with respect to the substrate member 545 can be suppressed. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the recessed notch 20546a3 (first region) can be lowered, it is possible to suppress shearing deformation of the elastic member 546a from becoming more difficult.

The non-concave notch 20546a4 has an outer shape that is approximately the same size as the second region 20545b in which the protrusion 545a1 of the first region 20545a is not formed. Further, the concave dimension L10 of the concave cutout 20546a3 (the depth dimension in the direction along the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, see FIG. 181(a)) is the concave dimension L10 of the concave notch 20546a3 (the depth dimension in the direction along the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, see FIG. 181(a)). It is set larger than the dimension L9 (see FIG. 180(b)) (L10>L9). Furthermore, the width dimension of the recessed notch 20546a3 (the dimension along the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5, the horizontal dimension in FIG. 181(a)) is the maximum diameter of the protrusion 545a1 (the horizontal dimension in FIG. 181(a) ), and in this embodiment, the width dimension of the recessed notch 20546a3 is set to be approximately twice the maximum diameter of the protrusion 545a1.

As shown in FIG. 182, when the conductive member 20546 is disposed on the liquid crystal display device 523, the cloth member 546b disposed on the side surface of the non-concave notch 20546a4 is disposed in a state in which it is in contact with the inside of the second region 20545b. be done. Further, the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 are compressed when the elastic member 20546a is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, so that the entire area of the cloth member 546b is in the first area. It is brought into contact with 20545a.

In this case, as described above, the concave dimension L10 is set larger than the protrusion dimension L9, so that the compression rate of the non-concave notch 20546a4 can be made larger than that of the concave notch 20546a3.

In the 20th embodiment, since the compression ratio of the non-recessed notch 20546a4 is made larger than that of the recessed notch 20546a3, and the protrusion 545a1 is arranged between the pair of non-recessed notches 20546a4, the non-recessed notch 20546a4 It is possible to prevent the portion from shifting its position unless it gets over the protrusion 545a1. That is, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 19545a can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in a direction perpendicular to the plane where they face each other, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the contact surfaces between the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are slid by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The slide members 520, 2520, 4520 are arranged so that the one side guided member 521 (rail side member 521a) and the other side guided member 522 are slid along the pair of rod-shaped bodies. It may be slidably displaced.

In each of the above embodiments, the structure that enables relative displacement between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b in the one side guided member 521 is formed from the insertion pin 521b1 and the insertion hole 521a1. However, the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) may be interposed between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b. The structure may be such that relative displacement is possible due to elastic deformation of the elastic body.

In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically located at least toward the display surface 523a from the axis of the rotating shaft 523c, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 may be aligned with the axis of the rotation shaft 523c.

Further, the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotation shaft 523c (the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523) may be located at the center in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, or It may be located eccentrically on one side or the other side in the direction. In this case, the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotating shaft 523c is preferably eccentric to the side closer to the drive motor 531 of the rotational drive mechanism. This is because, as in the case of the weight of the drive motor 531, the deviation of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be utilized.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are disposed so as to be slidable relative to the cover member 420 via the slide rail 510, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A member having another displacement form (displacement member) may be provided.

For example, a pair of rotating bodies may be provided that are rotatably supported by the cover member 420 with rotational axes in the same direction as the rotational direction of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300. In this case, the pair of rotating bodies are arranged symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300, and the rotation directions of the two bodies are opposite to each other. Thereby, the inertial force caused by the start or stop of rotation of the pair of rotating bodies can be canceled out, and rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the back case 300 can be suppressed. That is, while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 remain stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the back case 300, it is possible to easily allow only the pair of rotating bodies to rotate.

In the second embodiment, the rotational drive mechanism (drive motor 531, pinion gear 532, first gear 533, and second gear 534) is disposed on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and such a rotational drive mechanism may be provided on the other guided member 521.

In this case, when the base member 400 is placed at the second rotational position and an inertial force is applied due to the start or stop of sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523, the liquid crystal display device 523 Due to the rotational inertia of , it is possible to suppress the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of sliding displacement from becoming too large. As a result, when rotating the liquid crystal display device 523, the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) is slid in the horizontal direction while being able to suppress the liquid crystal display device 523 from being slid by its inertial force. In this case, the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the output of the drive motor 431 required for sliding displacement can be suppressed. Furthermore, wear of the slide rail 510 due to sliding displacement can be suppressed.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the passage members 5600 to 8600 are formed as passages for game balls flowing down the game area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other members are It's good as well. For example, it may be a spherical member used for presentation outside the gaming area.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the slide unit SL as a displacement member is displaced while overlapping the rear surface of the rear outer circumferential wall 7652a with the range Rg. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A portion may be displaced to a position where it is inserted into the passage member 8600 from the opening 8654 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. In this case, the displacement area of the slide unit SL can be expanded to the maximum, and the performance effect of the displacement can be further enhanced. That is, by making it possible to displace the displacement member more toward the front side and bringing it closer to the player, it is possible to give an impression of impact.

In the eighth embodiment, when the slide unit SL is displaced while the back surface of the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a overlaps the range Rg, the portion of the rear surface of the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a of the slide unit SL that overlaps the range Rg can be independently displaced. As a variable structure, when interference with the game ball is predicted, interference with the game ball may be suppressed by displacing only a portion of the variable structure. Thereby, when interference with the game balls is predicted, there is no need to displace the entire slide unit SL, and measures can be taken to promptly suppress the interference with the game balls.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments described above, the elastic members 546a and 17546a are made of polyurethane, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic member 546a may be formed from a rubber molded product or a coil spring.

In the 13th to 20th embodiments described above, the case where the elastic members 546a and 17546a are formed in a sponge shape is described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, foamed rubber (cellular rubber) obtained by kneading a foaming agent into a rubber raw material and vulcanizing it may be used. In this case, the shape of the cells may be closed cells or open cells.

In the 13th to 20th embodiments described above, the elastic members 546a and 17546a are formed from a non-conductive material, but the elastic members 546a and 17546a are not necessarily limited to this, and may be formed from a conductive material. good.

In the 13th to 20th embodiments, the cloth member 546b is wound around the elastic members 546a and 17546a once, but the cloth member 546b is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cloth member 546b may be disposed on three quarters of the entire circumference of the elastic members 546a, 17546a, extending from the side surface of the elastic member 546a, 17546a on the substrate member 545 side to the side surface on the liquid crystal device 543 side.

In this case, by opening one side surface, the elastic members 546a and 17546a can be easily elastically deformed. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545, the contact position between the conductive member 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is maintained. It's easy to do. As a result, rubbing between the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed, and the contact between the conductive member 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the contact surface and wear of the contact object.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments described above, the cloth member 546b is bonded to the outer surface of the elastic members 546a, 17546a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cloth member 546b may be non-adhered to the outer surfaces of the elastic members 546a and 17546a.

In this case, since the cloth member 546b can be made less susceptible to tensile force from the elastic member 546a, the elastic member 546a can be easily deformed. As a result, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the contact surfaces between the conductive member 16546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments described above, the case where the protrusion 545a1 is formed only on the substrate member 545 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 (back surface portion 543c). This makes it difficult for the contact surfaces between the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 to shift.

Further, in this case, it is preferable that the protrusion 545a1 of the liquid crystal device 543 and the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 do not overlap in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other. That is, it is preferable that the protrusion 545a1 on the liquid crystal device 543 side overlaps the through hole 545a2 of the substrate member 545 in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 543 and the substrate member 545 are misaligned in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the elastic deformation force of the conductive member 546 in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be increased. can. As a result, the contact surfaces between the liquid crystal device 543, the conductive member 546, and the liquid crystal device 543 can be made difficult to shift.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the first regions 545a, 19545a, and 20545a of the substrate member 545 are formed closer to one end than the center position in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. A control chip that controls the display of the liquid crystal device 543 or the light emission of an LED disposed on the substrate member 545 may be provided on one end side of the substrate member 545.

According to this, the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, and 20546 are arranged around the control chip, so that static electricity accumulated in the liquid crystal device is suppressed from being conducted to the control chip. It's easy to do. As a result, the control chip attached to the substrate member 545 can be easily protected.

In this case, the control chip is preferably disposed in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. As described above, the conductive member 546 is configured to be easily deformed in a direction perpendicular to the opening direction of the cloth member 546b by elastically deforming the elastic member 546a. Therefore, for example, if the control chip is arranged in a direction facing the pair of third portions 546b5 of the conductive member 546, when the conductive member 546 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 532, the cloth member 546b on the third portion 546b5 side As the elastic member 546a deforms, there is a possibility that the elastic member 546a will deform and approach the control chip. Therefore, there was a risk that the third portion 546b5 (cloth member 546b) would come into contact with the control chip, causing a short circuit in the wiring that conducts the control chip.

On the other hand, by arranging the control chip in the opening direction of the cloth member 545, it is possible to suppress the cloth member 546b from approaching the control chip when the conductive member 546 is elastically deformed. Therefore, short-circuiting of the wiring that conducts the control chip can be suppressed.

In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the covering member 545e is disposed on one surface of the ground portion 545d of the first region 545a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the covering member 545e may not be formed on one surface of the ground portion 545d, and the protrusion 545a1 may not be formed.

In this case, since the contact area between the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 and the ground portion 545d can be secured, when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged, , charges can be easily removed via the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

In the fourteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the rigidity of the cloth member 14546b is reduced by forming a notch in the cloth member 14546b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the stiffness may be reduced by forming a portion of the cloth member 14546b thin. In this case, conductivity can be ensured.

In the fifteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the through hole 15546d is formed at one location in the conductive member 15546, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of through holes 15546d may be formed in the conductive member 15546. Thereby, the deformability of the conductive member 15546 can be increased. In this case, the plurality of through holes 15546d may be formed in different sizes.

In the sixteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which one recessed portion 16546e is formed on one side surface of the conductive member 16546, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed portions 16546e may be arranged in parallel in the opposite direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4. Thereby, the deformability of the conductive member 16546 can be increased. In this case, the recessed widths and recessed distances of the plurality of recessed portions 16546e may be set to different dimensions.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example the slide member 520 in which the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable>
In a game machine comprising one side member, another side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and a slide member whose one side and the other side are guided and slid by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. , the slide member includes a guided member on one side guided by the member on one side, a guided member on the other side guided by the other side member, and a space between the guided portion on the one side and the guided portion on the other side. a rotating member that is rotatably supported by a shaft, and a state in which relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is allowed is a state in which relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member is allowed. Game machine A1 characterized by being different from the state.

Here, the one side member, the other side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and the slide member whose one side and the other side are guided and slidably displaced by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application has proposed that the slide member has one side guided member guided by one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided part and the other side guided part. The present invention has devised a structure in which a rotary member is rotatably supported in between (unknown at the time of filing of this application). According to this configuration, the rotating member is capable of not only sliding displacement but also rotation, thereby increasing the variety of performance operations. Further, by rotating the rotating member, the player can, for example, see not only the front side of the rotating member but also the back side.

However, in this configuration, when the rotating member is rotated, there is a problem in that the sliding member is slid with respect to the one side member and the other side member due to inertia force accompanying the start or stop of rotation. . That is, it is difficult to rotate only the rotating member while stopping the sliding member at a predetermined position relative to the one side member and the other side member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the allowable state of relative displacement of the guided member on one side with respect to the member on the one side is different from the allowable state of relative displacement of the guided member on the other side with respect to the other side member. When an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be used as a force (braking force) that presses the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, and the slide member It is possible to suppress sliding displacement with respect to. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the sliding member at a predetermined position relative to the one side member and the other side member.

In addition, as a configuration for forming a relative displacement of the one side guided member or the other side guided member with respect to the one side member or the other side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is reduced by the amount of the gap. A form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and relative displacement is possible due to the elastic deformation of the elastic body. , or a combination thereof.

In addition, examples of forms in which the allowable state differs include, for example, cases in which the allowable amount of relative displacement differs, cases in which the ease of relative displacement (force required to form a unit relative displacement) differs, or a combination of these. Examples include cases where

The gaming machine A1 includes a rotational drive means for rotationally driving the rotating member, and the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. A game machine A2 having a form that is more easily tolerated than the above, and characterized in that the rotational drive means is disposed on the one side guided member.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1, the relative displacement of one side guided member with respect to the one side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. Since the rotational driving means is disposed on the one side guided member whose relative displacement is easily tolerated, the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the sliding displacement is transferred between the sliding member and the one side member or the other side member. When applying a pressing force (braking force) to the holder, the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means can be used to increase the pressing force. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the sliding member at a predetermined position relative to the one side member and the other side member.

Examples of forms in which relative displacement is more likely to be tolerated include, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form a unit relative displacement is decreased, and when these are combined. Illustrated.

In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member, which is the opposite side to the other side guided member.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A2, since the rotation drive means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, On the other hand, when one side of the guided member is relatively displaced, the rotational drive means can be displaced along a trajectory farther from the other side of the displaced member. This makes it easier to utilize the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means when the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement is used as force (braking force) to press the slide member against one side member or the other side member. The pressing force can be increased by As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the sliding member at a predetermined position relative to the one side member and the other side member.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, a pair of the slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement, and when the slide members are slid in a direction in which they approach each other, one of the slide members The side guided member is arranged to face the other side guided member of the other slide member, and the other side guided member of one of the slide members is arranged to face the one side guided member of the other slide member. Features gaming machine A4.

Here, by arranging a pair of slide members facing each other along the direction of slide displacement and sliding them toward each other, when they are placed facing each other at the center position, the two slide members can be placed at the center position without any gap. If they come into contact with each other, the load on the drive means (motor) for slidingly displacing these slide members increases, causing damage to the drive means and the drive force transmission mechanism (gears, etc.).

On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, it is necessary to take into account dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances, or control tolerances, and provide a margin at the position where both are stopped (set a sufficient gap between the two at the center position). In this case, the back side will be visible to the player through the gap, resulting in deterioration of the appearance (performance effect).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, since the pair of sliding members are arranged facing each other in alternating directions, they are slid in the direction in which they approach each other, and the center When the slide members come into contact with each other in the position, the guided member on one side of the one slide member and the other guided member of the other slide member retreat to receive the guided member on the other side of the other slide member (the other and one). (The pair of slide members can be tilted with respect to the direction of slide displacement based on the above-described difference in the allowable state of relative displacement.) That is, even if the pair of slide members abut at the center position, damage to the drive means and the drive force transmission mechanism can be suppressed, so that the positions at which both of them are stopped can be set closer to each other. As a result, at the central position, the pair of slide members can be brought close to each other with a smaller gap between them, and the appearance (presentation effect) can be improved.

In any of gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member on which the one side member and the other side member are arranged, a sensor device arranged on the base member, and a detected member detected by the sensor device. A gaming machine A5, characterized in that the detected member is disposed on the other guided member.

According to gaming machine A5, the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member is in a form that is more difficult to tolerate than the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member. Since the detected member is provided, even if the attitude of the slide member changes, the positional shift of the detected member with respect to the base member (sensor device) can be suppressed. As a result, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A2 to A4, the position of the slide member relative to the base member (one side member and the other side member) can be detected more accurately.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example the slide mechanism 2500 in which the guided members 521 on one side are arranged to face each other>
A game machine comprising a base, a base member rotatably supported by the base, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, wherein the inertia force accompanying displacement of the displacement member is provided. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that the gaming machine B1 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing rotation of the base member with respect to the base.

Here, a gaming machine including a member formed to be displaceable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

In this case, for example, in a structure in which such a configuration (displacement member) is disposed on a base member and the base member is rotatably supported by a base (unknown at the time of filing of this application), the start of displacement of the displacement member or the displacement There was a problem in that the base member was rotated with respect to the base due to inertia caused by the stoppage of the base member. That is, it is difficult to displace the displacement member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since it is provided with a suppressing means that suppresses the rotation of the base member relative to the base due to the inertia force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, the rotation of the displacement member is started or the rotation is stopped. When an accompanying inertial force is applied to the base member, rotation of the base member with respect to the base can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide the sliding member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position relative to the base.

Note that the mode of displacement is not particularly limited, and examples include rotational displacement, rocking displacement, sliding displacement, and displacement in a combination of these. The trajectory of the slide displacement may be a straight line, a curve, or a combination of these. Further, the direction of displacement may be indefinite. For example, the displacement member may be elastically supported by the base member via an elastic body, and the displacement member may be displaced by elastic deformation of the elastic body.

In gaming machine B1, the displacement member includes a one side member, another side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and one side and the other side guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively, to be slid and displaced. the slide member includes a one-side guided member that is guided by the one-side member, an other-side guided member that is guided by the other-side member, the one-side guided portion, and a rotating member rotatably supported between the other side guided parts, and a permissible state of relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the other side member is determined by the rotation member rotatably supported between the other side guided parts. Unlike the state in which the relative displacement of the guide members is allowed, the pair of slide members has one guided member on one side and a guided member on the other side of one of the slide members, and a guided member on one side and the other side of the other slide member. A game machine B2 characterized in that the side guided members are arranged in opposing positions.

Here, the one side member, the other side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and the slide member whose one side and the other side are guided and slidably displaced by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application has proposed that the slide member has one side guided member guided by one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided part and the other side guided part. a rotary member rotatably supported between the two members, and the allowable state of relative displacement of the guided member on one side with respect to the member on the one side is different from the allowable state of relative displacement of the guided member on the other side with respect to the other side member. (Unknown at the time of filing this application) According to this configuration, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotary member is applied to the slide member, it is possible to cause the slide member to have a displacement component in a direction perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be used as a force (braking force) that presses the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, and as a result, the slide member And sliding displacement with respect to the other side member can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the sliding member at a predetermined position relative to the one side member and the other side member.

In this case, the applicant of the present application has devised a configuration in which the above-described one side member and the other side member are disposed on a base member, and the base member is rotatably supported by a base (unknown at the time of filing of the present application). According to this configuration, the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member and the direction of the rotational axis of the rotating member can be changed according to the rotational position of the base member, so it is possible to increase the variation of performance operations accordingly. .

However, in such a configuration, when slide members of the same configuration are arranged facing each other, when an inertial force is applied to the slide member due to the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member, one slide A displacement component perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement in one member and a displacement component perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement in the other sliding member are in alternate directions (directions that are point symmetrical and give rotational inertia to the base member). Therefore, there was a problem that the base member was rotated with respect to the base. That is, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1, the pair of sliding members are connected to one side of the guided member and the other guided member of one sliding member, and the other side of the sliding member. Since the guided member on one side and the guided member on the other side are arranged to face each other, when an inertial force is applied to the sliding member due to the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member, one The displacement component perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement in one slide member and the displacement component perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement in the other slide member can be in the same direction (line-symmetrical direction), and the base member is It is possible to suppress rotation relative to the That is, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide the sliding member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position relative to the base.

In addition, as a configuration for forming a relative displacement of the one side guided member or the other side guided member with respect to the one side member or the other side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is reduced by the amount of the gap. A form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and relative displacement is possible due to the elastic deformation of the elastic body. , or a combination thereof.

In addition, examples of forms in which the allowable state differs include, for example, cases in which the allowable amount of relative displacement differs, cases in which the ease of relative displacement (force required to form a unit relative displacement) differs, or a combination of these. Examples include cases where

In the game machine B2, the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member, and the slide member is moved approximately horizontally. When the base member is slid in the direction, the base member is rotated with respect to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is located approximately vertically above the other side guided member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that a position is set.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of one side guided member with respect to the one side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. When the slide member is slid in a substantially horizontal direction, the base member is moved relative to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which one side of the guided member is located approximately vertically above the other side of the guided member. Since the rotational position is set, when the inertia force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the sliding member, the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement (when the sliding member is moved to one side) The displacement component that applies a pressing force (braking force) to the member or the other side member can be vertically downward (in the direction of gravity). Thereby, when rotating the rotating member, it is possible to suppress the sliding member from floating up, and the rotation thereof can be stabilized.

Examples of forms in which relative displacement is more likely to be tolerated include, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form a unit relative displacement is decreased, and when these are combined. Illustrated.

In the game machine B2, the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member, and the slide member is moved approximately horizontally. When the base member is slid in the direction, the base member is moved relative to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned substantially vertically below the other side guided member. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that a rotational position is set.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B2, the relative displacement of one side guided member with respect to the one side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. When the slide member is slid in a substantially horizontal direction, the base member is moved relative to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which one side of the guided member is positioned approximately vertically below the other side of the guided member. Since the rotational position of the slide member is set, when an inertial force is applied to the slide member due to the start or stop of the slide displacement of the slide member, the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement (the slide member The displacement component that exerts the force (braking force) that presses the member against the one side member or the other side member can be vertically upward (in the opposite direction to the direction of gravity). Thereby, when the slide member is slid, the resistance due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, wear of the sliding portion due to sliding displacement can be suppressed.

Examples of forms in which relative displacement is more likely to be tolerated include, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form a unit relative displacement is decreased, and when these are combined. Illustrated.

A game machine B5, which is a game machine B3, further comprising a rotational drive means for rotationally driving the rotating member, and the rotational drive means is disposed on the one side guided member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B3, since the rotational drive means is disposed on the one side of the guided member whose relative displacement is more easily tolerated compared to the other side of the guided member, the sliding When the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of displacement is used as a force (braking force) to press the slide member against one side member or the other side member, the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means is used to increase the pressing force. can do. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is possible to easily suppress the sliding member from floating up, and the rotation thereof can be stabilized.

A game machine B6, which is a game machine B4, further comprising a rotational drive means for rotationally driving the rotating member, and the rotational drive means is disposed on the other side guided member.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement can be made vertically upward (in the direction opposite to the direction of gravity), and one side is covered. Since the rotational drive means is disposed on the other guided member whose relative displacement is difficult to tolerate compared to the guide member, due to the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means, the rotational drive means is moved in a direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement. It is possible to suppress the displacement component from becoming too large. As a result, when rotating the rotary member, it is possible to suppress the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and when sliding the sliding member, it is possible to suppress the driving force required for the sliding displacement, and to suppress the sliding displacement of the sliding member. Wear of the sliding parts due to displacement can be suppressed.

A gaming machine B7 in the gaming machine B5, wherein the rotational driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member, which is the opposite side to the other side guided member.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B5, since the rotational drive means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, On the other hand, when one side of the guided member is relatively displaced, the rotational drive means can be displaced along a trajectory farther from the other side of the displaced member. This makes it easier to utilize the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means when the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement is used as force (braking force) to press the slide member against one side member or the other side member. The pressing force can be increased by As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is possible to easily suppress the sliding member from floating up, and the rotation thereof can be stabilized.

A gaming machine B8 in the gaming machine B6, wherein the rotational driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the other side guided member, which is the opposite side to the other side member.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B6, since the rotational drive means is disposed on the outer surface side of the other side guided member, which is the opposite side to the other side member, the one side member and the other side When the one side guided member and the other side guided member are respectively relatively displaced with respect to the member, the rotation drive means can be positioned at a portion where the amount of relative displacement is smaller. This can prevent the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement from becoming too large due to the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means. As a result, when rotating the rotary member, it is possible to suppress the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and when sliding the sliding member, it is possible to suppress the driving force required for the sliding displacement, and to suppress the sliding displacement of the sliding member. Wear of the sliding parts due to displacement can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example the slide member 4520 in which the position of the rotating shaft 4523c is eccentric>
In a game machine provided with a slide member formed to be slidably displaceable between a first position and a second position, the slide member is disposed opposite to the slide member disposed at the first position from a side opposite to the second position. and a presentation means for performing presentation between the opposing member and the sliding member, the sliding member being rotatable by a rotating shaft located eccentrically along the direction of the sliding displacement. A gaming machine C1 characterized by the following.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a sliding member that is slidably displaceable between a first position and a second position (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application includes an opposing member disposed to face the sliding member disposed at the first position from the opposite side from the second position, and a presentation means for performing presentation between the opposing member and the sliding member. Invented a gaming machine (unknown at the time of filing). However, in the above-mentioned configuration, if the distance between the sliding member disposed at the first position and the facing member is narrow, the effect cannot be sufficiently produced by the effect means (for example, the movement of the member for effect is difficult). (It is not possible to secure enough space, or it is not possible to secure an area where the elements for presentation can be seen.) On the other hand, if the first position of the slide member is shifted toward the second position in order to secure such a distance, the slide member will protrude toward the second position, and the slide member will be positioned on the trajectory of the slide displacement of the slide member. This results in a decrease in the visible area of the component (for example, a liquid crystal display device). If the facing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member increases, leading to an increase in the size of the entire device.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the slide member is formed to be rotatable by a rotating shaft located eccentrically along the direction of slide displacement, the distance between the opposing member and the opposing member is adjusted depending on the rotational position. The interval between can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the facing distance with the opposing member becomes large, the performance by the presentation means can be sufficiently performed, while at the same time, the sliding member is moved to a rotating position where the facing distance with the opposing member becomes small. By rotating, the amount of protrusion of the slide member toward the second position can be reduced, and a visible area for other members can be secured accordingly. Further, since there is no need to shift the facing member to the opposite side from the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the overall size of the device can be reduced.

In addition, examples of the presentation means include one that displaces a displaceable member using the space between the opposing member and the sliding member, and one that displaces the opposing member by using the space between the opposing member and the sliding member. Examples include those that utilize the light to displace the display, those that allow display or decoration on the back side to be seen from between the facing member and the sliding member, those that irradiate light between the facing member and the sliding member, and those that combine these. Ru.

A gaming machine C2 in the gaming machine C1, wherein the presentation means includes an irradiation means that irradiates light toward a space between the facing member and the slide member.

Here, for example, in a configuration in which the opposing member emits light toward the space facing the slide member, an effect may be created in which the light reflected by the slide member is made visible to the player from the space between the slide member and the opposing member. It can be carried out.

In this case, in the above-described configuration, if the distance between the opposing slide member and the facing member disposed at the first position is narrow, the light reflected by the slide member cannot be sufficiently seen by the player. On the other hand, if the first position of the slide member is shifted toward the second position in order to secure such a distance, the slide member will protrude toward the second position, and the slide member will be positioned on the trajectory of the slide displacement of the slide member. This results in a decrease in the visible area of the component (for example, a liquid crystal display device). If the facing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member increases, leading to an increase in the size of the entire device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the sliding member is formed to be rotatable by a rotating shaft located eccentrically along the direction of sliding displacement, so that the sliding member can be rotated at its rotational position. Accordingly, the distance between the opposing members can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the distance between the opposing member and the opposing member becomes larger, the light emitted from the irradiation means can be sufficiently seen by the player. By rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the distance is smaller, the amount of protrusion of the slide member toward the second position can be reduced, and a visible area for other members can be secured accordingly. Further, since there is no need to shift the facing member to the opposite side from the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the overall size of the device can be reduced.

The irradiation means may be installed on the opposing member so as to be able to irradiate the sliding member, placed on the sliding member so as to be able to irradiate the opposing member, or between the facing member of the sliding member and the opposing member. Examples include a mode in which the light source is disposed on the back side between the opposing sides so as to be irradiated, and a mode in which these are combined.

A gaming machine C3, which is the gaming machine C1 or C2, comprises a base and a base member rotatably supported by the base, and the slide member is disposed on the base member.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the position of the center of gravity can be changed by rotating the slide member. That is, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted to a position suitable for rotation of the base member relative to the base while maintaining the slide member at the first position or the second position. As a result, for example, the rotation of the base member can be stabilized. Alternatively, the driving force required to rotate the base member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C3, a gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a pair of the sliding members are arranged facing each other along the direction of the sliding displacement.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C3, the pair of slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of slide displacement, that is, the pair of slide members can be arranged symmetrically. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be brought closer to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base. Thereby, even if the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the rotation of the slide member is small, the change in the position of the center of gravity can be easily made effective.

In the game machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member relative to the base is a direction in which the position of the center of gravity is lowered, the rotation of the slide member lowers the position of the center of gravity to the base. A game machine C5 characterized in that the base member is moved away from the center of rotation of the base member.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member relative to the base is in the direction of lowering the center of gravity, the rotation of the slide member Since the position of the center of gravity is moved away from the center of rotation of the base member relative to the base, it is possible to make it easier to rotate the base member relative to the base by the amount of change in the position of the center of gravity. Thereby, the driving force required to rotate the base member can be suppressed.

In any of gaming machines C3 to C5, if the direction of rotation of the base member relative to the base is in a direction that raises the position of the center of gravity, the position of the center of gravity is raised by the rotation of the slide member. A game machine C6 characterized in that the base member is moved closer to the center of rotation of the base member relative to the base.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is in the direction of raising the center of gravity, the sliding member Since the rotation brings the center of gravity closer to the center of rotation of the base member relative to the base, it is possible to make it easier to rotate the base member relative to the base by the amount of change in the position of the center of gravity. Thereby, the driving force required to rotate the base member can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example the overhanging wall portion 5640 in which the opening portion 5641 is formed>
In a game machine equipped with a passage member that surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes, the passage member has an opening formed in a side surface thereof, and the object is a part of the passage member. A gaming machine D1, characterized in that the gaming machine D1 is formed so as to be able to pass through the opening while protruding outward from the opening.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a passage member that surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-192836). According to such a passage member, for example, a game ball passing through the game area can be caused to flow in from one end side, pass through the back side of the game area, and then ejected into the game area from the other end side. However, when configured in this way, there is a problem in that the movable range of the effect member disposed movably on the back side of the gaming area is restricted due to the protrusion of the passage member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the passage member is provided with an opening formed on the side surface thereof, and is formed so that the object can pass therethrough with a part of it protruding outside from the opening. Therefore, the protrusion of the passage member can be suppressed compared to the case where the entire object is surrounded on the inner circumferential side. Therefore, the arrangement space for other members and the movable range of other members can be secured accordingly.

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the passage member is arbitrary, and examples thereof include a circular cross-section, an elliptical cross-section, a polygonal cross-section, or a combination thereof.

A gaming machine D2 in the gaming machine D1, wherein a pair of the openings are arranged facing each other in the passage member.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, since a pair of openings are arranged facing each other in the passage member, the gap between the facing sides of the side surfaces where the pair of openings are formed can be narrowed. Accordingly, the installation space for other members and the movable range of other members can be efficiently secured.

A gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D1 or D2, wherein the passage member has an inclined surface formed on the inner surface side at the periphery of the opening.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member has an inclined surface formed on the inner surface side at the periphery of the opening, so that the object can be easily moved by the amount of the inclined surface. To improve the rigidity of the passage member by increasing the amount by which the passage member can protrude from the opening to the outside, thereby suppressing the protrusion of the passage member, and ensuring the thickness of the passage member at the peripheral edge of the opening. be able to.

In the game machine D3, the passage member is characterized in that a distance between base ends of the inclined surfaces in a direction perpendicular to the direction of passage of the object is set to be smaller than at least a diameter of the object. A gaming machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D3, the passage member has a dimension in which the interval between the base ends of the sloped surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the direction of passage of the target object is at least smaller than the diameter of the target object. Therefore, when a part of the object projects outward from the opening, it is possible to prevent the object from being received only by the tip (inner peripheral end) of the inclined surface. That is, since the ball can be received in the portion where the inclined surface is not formed, damage to the passage member (periphery of the opening) can be suppressed.

In any one of gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed with a rectangular cross section from four walls, and the opening is formed in at least one of the four walls. A gaming machine D5 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed with a rectangular cross section from the four walls, and has a passage member formed on at least one of the four walls. Since the opening is formed as an opening, the section modulus of the passage member can be ensured and its rigidity can be improved.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed to have a circular cross-section with an inner diameter approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and the circular cross-section is formed by a line segment connecting two points on the curve. A gaming machine D6, wherein the opening is formed by cutting.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a circular cross-sectional shape with an inner diameter approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and the passage member is formed on a curved line in the circular cross-sectional shape. Since the opening is formed by cutting the two points in a straight line, the overhang of the passage member can be suppressed to a minimum. As a result, the arrangement space for other members and the movable range of other members can be efficiently secured.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D6, the passage member has a curved or bent passage path for the object, and the opening portion has a direction in which a centrifugal force acts on the object due to the curvature or bending of the passage path. A gaming machine D7 is formed on a side surface of the passage member opposite to the above.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the opening is formed in a passageway in which the formation position of the opening is on the opposite side to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the object due to the curvature or bending of the passage path. Since the opening is formed on the side opposite to the side on which the object is pressed by centrifugal force, it is possible to prevent the periphery of the opening from being worn or damaged.

Any of the game machines D1 to D7 includes a displacement member formed to be displaceable, and the displacement member extends to a range that includes at least a displacement locus of a portion of the object protruding from the opening of the passage member. A gaming machine D8 characterized in that it is formed to be displaceable.

According to the game machine D8, any one of the game machines D1 to D7 includes a displacement member formed to be displaceable, and the displacement member moves the displacement locus of a part of the object protruding from the opening of the passage member. Since it is formed so that it can be displaced at least within the range included, it is possible to effectively utilize the area in which the passage member has less protrusion, thereby expanding the displacement area of the displacement member. Thereby, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

Note that the displacement member may be formed so that a portion thereof can be displaced from the opening of the passage member to a position where it is inserted into the inside of the passage member. In this case, the displacement area of the displacement member can be expanded to the maximum, and the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be further enhanced. For example, by making it possible to displace the displacement member further forward and bringing it closer to the player, it is possible to make the displacement member more powerful.

The gaming machine D8 includes a detection means for detecting the presence or absence of an object in at least the area where the opening of the passage member is formed, and when the object is detected by the detection means, the displacement member A gaming machine D9 characterized in that displacement is restricted to at least a range that includes the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D8, when the detection means detects an object in the area where at least the opening of the passage member is formed, the displacement member moves at least along the displacement trajectory (the passage member Since the displacement member is restricted to a range that includes at least the displacement locus of the part of the object protruding from the opening of the object, it is possible to avoid the displacement member from interfering with the object.

In the game machine D9, the detection means includes a first switch and a second switch that are respectively disposed upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member and detect passage of the object at each of these disposed positions. A gaming machine D10 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D9, the detection means is arranged upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member and detects passage of the object at each of the arrangement positions. Since the first switch and the second switch are provided, it is possible to reliably detect the presence or absence of an object in at least the area where the opening of the passage member is formed. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the displacement member from interfering with the object.

<Characteristics Group E> (Produced with over-winning game balls)
Based on a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which the entry of game balls into the ball entry means is regulated and a second state in which the regulation is released, and the establishment of a specific condition. and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that changes the variable member from the first state to the second state, and when the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game, the ball entering means a counting means for counting the number of played game balls; and a variable variable member for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the count value by the counting means reaching a predetermined upper limit. A performance execution means for performing a performance based on a game ball entering the ball entering means before being changed to the second state by the means and the variable means, and a performance executed by the performance execution means. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the performance determining means is configured to be able to determine a special performance mode when a special condition is satisfied. .

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines enter a winning state when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed based on a starting ball. In such a gaming machine, when a winning state occurs, a large opening provided on the board is set to an open state. Since a prize ball is awarded to the player by placing the game ball into the large open opening, it is advantageous for the player to achieve a winning state. In addition, when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize after being set to the open state, the large open mouth is set to the closed state in which it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter. In addition, some of these conventional gaming machines execute a special performance (over-win performance) when it is detected that more than a specified number of game balls have won with the large opening opening in one open state. Some games are designed to increase players' interest by doing so.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, even if an over-winning effect is executed, the player is only made aware that he has won a slightly larger number of prize balls than usual, and the player's interest is not sufficiently stimulated. There were cases where it was not possible to improve.

On the other hand, the gaming machine E1 is variable between a ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter, a first state in which the entry of game balls into the ball entering means is restricted, and a second state in which the restriction is released. a variable member, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which the variable member is changed from the first state to the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the case where the variable member is changed to A variable means for changing the state from a second state to the first state, and a production for performing a production based on a game ball entering the ball entering means before being varied to the second state by the variable means. It has an execution means and a performance determining means that determines a performance to be performed by the performance execution means, and the performance determining means is capable of determining a special performance mode when a special condition is satisfied. It is composed of

This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine E1, based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, an acquisition means for acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage means for storing information on the basis of establishment of a determination condition. The special condition is stored in the storage means by the discriminating means, and includes a discriminating means for discriminating information, and a specific condition establishing means for establishing the specific condition when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that at least one condition is set that the information determined as a specific determination result is stored.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are achieved. That is, there is an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage means for storing the information based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. It has a discriminating means for discriminating information, and a specific condition establishing means for establishing the specific condition when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, and the special condition is stored in the storage means for discriminating the information. At least one condition is set that the information that is determined as a specific determination result by the means is stored.

Thereby, by executing the performance in the special performance mode, it is possible to make the player recognize that information that results in a specific determination result is stored in the storage means. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player play the game in anticipation of the execution of the performance in the special performance mode, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved while the bonus game is being executed.

In the gaming machine E2, the special condition is satisfied with a predetermined probability when the storage means stores the information that is determined as a specific determination result by the determination means. Machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the special conditions include a predetermined probability when the information that is determined as a specific determination result by the determining means is stored in the storage means. Therefore, even if the performance of the special performance mode is not executed in the bonus game, there is a possibility that information that results in a specific determination result is stored in the storage means. Therefore, even if the performance of the special performance mode is not executed, it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that information that results in a specific determination result is stored, so that the player's play will be affected. It has the effect of maintaining motivation.

A gaming machine E4 characterized in that in any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the performance execution means executes the performance using game balls counted by the counting means.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the performance execution means executes the performance using the game balls counted by the counting means. This has the effect that the number of parts can be reduced compared to the case where a configuration for performing effects is provided separately from the game balls.

In the gaming machine E4, the special performance mode includes a mode in which the game balls counted by the counting means are guided to a specific area configured to be visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the special performance mode is a mode in which the game balls counted by the counting means are guided to a specific area configured to be visible to the player. Since the game includes the following, it is possible to make the player play the game by focusing on a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine E6, characterized in that any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5 has a sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the performances executed by the performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, it has an audio output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, so that the auditory sense It is possible to realize a realistic performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

A gaming machine E7 characterized in that any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6 has a display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the gaming machine E7 has a display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a visual presentation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

End effect execution means for executing an end effect indicating the end of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, and a mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution means. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it has a termination performance mode determining means for determining.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are achieved. That is, an end performance execution means that executes an end performance indicating the end of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, and an end performance mode determination that determines the mode of the end performance executed by the end performance execution means. Since the present invention has the following means, there is an effect that it is possible to easily make the player understand that the bonus game has ended.

<Characteristics Group F> (forms a role object by inverting the sub-liquid crystal)
a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means; A display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the first display means having a first specific notification section for notifying the player of a specific notification mode as one of the effects and the effect execution means. A second display means having a second display area and a second specific notification section for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area, the first display area and the second display area. and a second state in which the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section can be made visible to the player, respectively. A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it has a displacement means capable of displacing the first display means and the second display means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable member, etc., and are capable of performing various performance operations through display effects and movable effects. Some of these conventional gaming machines employ technology that ensures the visibility of the display effect even if, for example, a movable member moves toward the front side of the display device while the display effect is being executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-134091).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it was not assumed that the orientation of the display device itself would be variable. For this reason, if the display device itself is made to operate in a variable manner, it may become impossible to realize an appropriate presentation operation using the display presentation. In other words, there is a possibility that it will be difficult to increase the degree of freedom in production.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, there is a performance execution means that executes a performance based on the discrimination information, and a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the performances executed by the performance execution means. and a first specific notification section for notifying the player of a specific notification mode as one of the effects on the back side of the first display area; As one of the effects, a second display has a second display area in which a display mode is displayed and a second specific notification section for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area. means, a first state in which the first display area and the second display area are each visible to the player, and the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section, respectively, to the player. and a displacement means capable of displacing at least the first display means and the second display means to a second state in which they can be visually recognized.

Thereby, a plurality of effects with different modes can be realized using the first display means and the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in production can be increased.

In the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the specific notification mode is formed by combining the notification modes respectively notified by the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section. Characteristic gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the specific notification mode is combined with the notification modes respectively notified by the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section. Since the notification mode is formed, there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the specific notification mode is made up of specific symbols, and a part of the specific symbols is displayed in the first specific notification section, and a part of the specific symbols is displayed in the second specific notification section. The remaining symbols among the specific symbols that are not displayed in the first specific notification section are displayed, and the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the specific symbol is formed by combining the symbols.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific notification mode is made up of specific symbols, a part of which is displayed in the first specific notification section, and a part of the specific symbols is displayed in the second specific notification section. , among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols that are not displayed by the first specific notification section are displayed, and the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. By combining, the specific pattern is formed.

As a result, a specific symbol can be dynamically displayed using the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section, so there is an effect that the specific symbol can be displayed more clearly.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3 has a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, and the effect execution means displays the effect in a third display area of the third display means. In the first state, the first display area and the second display area are adjacent to and parallel to the third display area, or at least partially overlap with each other. A game machine F4 characterized in that it is placed at a position.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first display means and the second display means have a third display means different from the second display means, and the effect execution means displays a predetermined effect as one of the effects in a third display area of the third display means. A display mode is displayed, and in the first state, the first display area and the second display area are arranged adjacent to and in parallel with the third display area, or at least partially overlap with each other. Therefore, the effect is that it is possible to realize a production with a higher degree of freedom.

The performance execution means includes a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the particular performance is executed by the performance execution means in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the specific notification mode is easily executed when executing the effect.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the player is provided with a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the specific performance is executed by the performance execution means, and when the performance execution means executes the specific performance. Moreover, it is easy to carry out the specific notification mode.

This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that a specific notification mode will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, and performance determining means for determining a performance mode to be executed by the performance execution means based on the determination result of the determining means. A gaming machine F6 characterized in that it has the following.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a performance determining means that determines the performance mode to be executed by the performance execution means based on the determination result of the discriminating means.

This has the effect that it is possible to realize various production modes depending on the determination result of the determination means.

<Characteristic Group G> (Display by moving the pattern on the main LCD while moving the sub-LCD)
A first display means capable of displaying a symbol, a second display means different from the first display means, and at least the second display means at a position where the display area of the second display means overlaps with the display area of the first display means. A predetermined pattern is displayed at the overlapping position on the first movable means capable of moving the first movable means, the display control means for controlling the display of the first display means and the second display means, and the second display means, respectively. state, when the first movable means moves over the display area of the first display means, the first Display mode setting means for setting the display control means to a movable display mode capable of forming one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the display means. Game machine G1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a plurality of display devices such as LGH displays. In such conventional gaming machines, by using a main display device that displays the main effects related to the game and a sub display device that displays auxiliary effects, the degree of freedom in display effects is increased and the player's interest is improved. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-117576).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the degree of freedom in display effects.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, there is a first display means capable of displaying symbols, a second display means different from the first display means, and a display area of the second display means is a display area of the first display means. a first movable means capable of moving at least the second display means to a position overlapping with the second display means; a display control means for controlling display of the first display means and the second display means, respectively; and a second display means. When the first movable means moves over the display area of the first display means with a predetermined pattern displayed at the overlapping position, the display of the first display means is exposed by the movement. display mode setting for setting a movable display mode in the display control means in which one symbol can be formed by combining with the predetermined symbol displayed on the first display means after the region has been moved; and means.

This has the effect that display performance with a higher degree of freedom can be realized using the first display means and the second display means.

In the gaming machine G1, a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means and a display area of the third display means overlap with the first display area, and one end of each of the third display means overlaps with the first display area. and a second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means to the same position, the display control means is configured such that each of the second display means and the third display means When the two symbols are moved to the same position, a specific display mode is displayed in which one symbol is displayed across display areas with the one end as a boundary, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Game machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, a display area of the third display means overlaps with the first display area, and one end of each of the third display means is the same as the second display means. a second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means to a position, and the display control means is configured such that each of the second display means and the third display means When the two symbols are moved to the same position, a specific display mode is displayed in which one symbol is displayed across display areas with the one end as a boundary, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

As a result, one symbol can be displayed using the second display means and the third display means, so there is an effect that a display with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

In the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means is configured to set the specific display mode to the second display mode and the third display mode when the specific display mode is displayed on the second display mode and the third display mode by the display control means. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that when at least one of the display means is moved in a direction away from the display means, a specific movable display mode is set.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means displays the specific display mode using the second display means and the third display means by the display control means. In this state, when at least one of the second display means and the third display means is moved in a direction away from the second display means, the second display means and the third display means are set. There is an effect that appropriate display contents can be displayed for each of the three display means depending on the arrangement thereof.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode is such that the first symbol displayed as the specific display mode is arranged between the first display means and the second display means, between the first display means and the A gaming machine G4 characterized in that it is set to be displayed on each of the third display means and the third display means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode is such that the first symbol displayed as the specific display mode is Since the second display means, the first display means, and the third display means are set to respectively display the information, it is possible to use the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means more freely. This has the effect that highly accurate display contents can be realized.

<Characteristics H group> (Right-handed notification on rotating display device)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. a discrimination execution means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a display means for displaying identification information based on a discrimination result by the discrimination means; and a display means specific to the display means. When the identification information based on the discrimination result is displayed, the firing intensity of the game ball is determined based on the player's operation in a gaming machine having a variable ball entrance means that allows the game ball to enter the game ball. A first flow path through which game balls fired at a first firing intensity can flow down by a firing means that can be fired with a variable firing intensity, and the first firing intensity is different from that of the first flow path. After the game ball fired at the second firing intensity flows down and the second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is arranged and the identification information based on the specific discrimination result are displayed, the second flow path A gaming machine H1 comprising: a suggesting means for causing the display means to display a suggesting mode suggesting that the game ball be launched into the road.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable member, etc., and are capable of performing various performance operations through display effects and movable effects. Some of such conventional game machines are capable of displaying a suggestive display image that suggests the direction in which the game ball is to be launched on a display device. This conventional gaming machine employs a technology that ensures the visibility of the suggestion display image even if, for example, a movable member moves to the front side of the display device while the suggestion display image is being displayed (for example, (Unexamined Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-134091).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it was not assumed that the orientation of the display device could be changed. For this reason, when the orientation of the display device is varied, there is a risk that the direction in which the game ball will be launched may not be properly notified.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the acquisition means. a storage means for storing the information acquired in the storage means; a determination execution means for determining the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a determination condition; A device comprising: a display means for displaying identification information; and a variable ball entry means that allows a game ball to be entered when the identification information based on the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. and a firing means capable of firing a game ball with varying firing strength based on a player's operation, and a game ball that is fired at a first firing strength by the firing means and capable of flowing down. a possible first flow path, a second flow path in which game balls shot at a second shot intensity different from the first shot intensity flow down, and in which the variable ball entry means is disposed; After the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, the game apparatus further comprises a suggesting means for causing the display means to display a suggestion mode suggesting that the game ball be launched into the second channel.

This allows the player who has confirmed the suggested mode to fire the game ball at the second firing intensity, so even a beginner can easily insert the game ball into the variable ball entry means. It can be made into a ball. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gaming machine whose gaming method is easier to understand.

In the gaming machine H1, the suggesting mode includes a rotation means capable of rotating the display means based on establishment of a rotation condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it has at least a part of an annular shape and includes a direction indicating aspect indicating the direction of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the indication mode includes a rotation means capable of rotating the display means based on establishment of a rotation condition with the display area of the display means facing the front side; The method includes a direction indicating aspect that has at least a portion of the shape and indicates the direction of the second flow path.

Thereby, even if the display means is rotated, there is an effect that the direction of the second flow path can be accurately indicated by the direction indicating mode having at least a part of the annular shape.

A gaming machine H3 in the gaming machine H2, wherein the direction suggestion mode is a dynamic display in which the game ball rotates in a direction in which the ball flies to the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the direction suggestion mode dynamically displays the game ball rotating in the direction in which the ball flies to the second flow path, so that the player can see the direction. On the other hand, there is an effect that the direction in which the game ball is to be shot can be notified more clearly.

A gaming machine H4, characterized in that in the gaming machine H2 or H3, text information indicating that a game ball is to be launched into the second channel is displayed as part of the direction suggestion mode.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine H2 or H3, text information indicating that the game ball is to be launched into the second channel is displayed as part of the direction suggestion mode, so that the direction suggestion is not performed. This has the effect that the player who visually recognizes the mode can more clearly understand the direction in which the game ball is to be launched.

A gaming machine H5 characterized in that in any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggestion mode is displayed with a pattern indicating the direction of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggestion mode is displayed with a pattern indicating the direction of the second flow path, so that the pattern is displayed to the player. This has the effect of allowing the player to intuitively understand the direction in which the game ball should be launched based on the impression of the player.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, there is a reversing means for inverting the display means so that the back side thereof is located on the player side, and on the back side of the display means there is a decorative portion indicating the direction of the second flow path. A gaming machine H6 is characterized in that it is arranged with.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means includes a reversing means for inverting the display means so that the back side thereof is located on the player side, and a decorative portion indicating the direction of the second flow path is disposed on the back side of the display means. Even if the display means is reversed by the reversing means, there is an effect that the player can accurately understand the direction in which the game ball is to be launched.

In the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion includes light emitting means arranged in order toward the second flow path, and the light emitting means are controlled to turn on in order toward the second flow path. Gaming machine H7 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H6, the decoration section includes light emitting means arranged in sequence toward the second flow path, and the light emitting means is arranged in the direction of the second flow path. Since the lighting is controlled in order in the direction of the road, there is an effect that the player can more easily understand the direction in which the game ball is to be launched.

<Characteristics Group I> (Uses the sub liquid crystal as the main liquid crystal.)
A discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, a display means for displaying identification information based on a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. When the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a performance execution means for causing the display means to display a performance mode associated with the identification information based on the determination result; In the gaming machine, the display means includes a main display means and a first display means. A sub-display means movable at least at a first position parallel to the display area and a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means; When the movable means is movable to the second position and the sub-display means is movable to the first position, the identification information is displayed on the main display means, and the identification information is displayed on the sub-display means. When the sub-display means is switched to the first state in which at least a part of the production mode is displayed, the sub-display means is moved to the second position, and a specific condition is satisfied, the identification is displayed on the sub-display means. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it has a switching means capable of switching and setting a second state in which information is displayed.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a plurality of display devices such as LGH displays. In such conventional gaming machines, by using a main display device that displays the main effects related to the game and a sub display device that displays auxiliary effects, the degree of freedom in display effects is increased and the player's interest is improved. We are trying to Furthermore, among such conventional game machines, there are machines in which the sub-display device can be moved to the front side of the main display device, and a composite display effect can be executed with the main display device and the sub-display device (for example, , Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-029606).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the degree of freedom in display performance.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine I1, there is a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, a display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a display means for displaying the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information, and when the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, displaying a performance mode accompanying the identification information on the display means based on the determination result. and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player when identification information is displayed on the display means based on the specific determination result, the display comprising: The means includes at least a main display means, a sub display means movable at least to a first position parallel to the display area of the main display means, and a second position overlapping with the front side of the display area of the main display means. a movable means configured to be able to move the sub-display means between the first position and the second position; and when the sub-display means is moved to the first position, the main display switching to a first state in which the identification information is displayed on the means and at least a part of the presentation mode is displayed on the sub-display means, the sub-display means is moved to the second position, and the specific condition is met. and a switching means capable of switching and setting a second state in which the identification information is displayed on the sub-display means when the identification information is established.

Thereby, it is possible to appropriately switch between the first state and the second state according to the position of the sub-display means, so there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

In the gaming machine I1, the sub-display means is composed of at least a first display means disposed at one end of the main display means, and a second display means disposed at the other end of the main display means. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that, in one position, the first display means and the second display means face each other with the main display means between them.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the sub-display means includes at least a first display means disposed at one end of the main display means, and a second display means disposed at the other end of the main display means, and At this position, the first display means and the second display means face each other with the main display means in between.

This has the effect of further increasing the degree of freedom in the presentation mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means at the first position.

In the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means have their one ends in contact with each other, thereby covering the display area of the main display means to make it difficult to see. A gaming machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, in the second position, the first display means and the second display means have their one ends in contact with each other, so that the display on the main display means is Since it covers the area in such a way that it is difficult to visually recognize it, in the second position, it is possible to realize a compact display using only the sub-display means. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate display area can be set according to the display content.

A gaming machine I4, characterized in that the gaming machine I2 or I3 has rotating means for rotating the first display means and the second display means, respectively, about the main display means.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, it has a rotating means for rotating the first display means and the second display means respectively about the main display means, so that the sub This has the effect of realizing a display performance with a higher degree of freedom using the display means.

In the gaming machine I4, the rotation means rotates the first display means and the second display means so that the first display means and the second display means are arranged in the vertical direction of the main display means. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that the first display means and the second display means are variable in the vertical position thereof and the horizontal position in which the first display means and the second display means are located in the left-right direction of the main display means.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I4, the rotation means rotates the first display means and the second display means, so that the rotation means rotates the main display means in the vertical direction. The first display means and the second display means can be varied between vertical positions where the first display means and the second display means are located, and horizontal positions where the first display means and the second display means are located in the horizontal direction of the main display means. Therefore, there is an effect that a display performance with a higher degree of freedom can be realized using the sub-display means.

In the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position, and then the sub display means and the main display means are moved to the vertical position. a first fused display mode in which the fused display is displayed; and a first fused display mode in which the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right positions to the second position and then moved to the left and right positions; A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it has a fused display mode setting means for switching and setting a second fused display mode that is fused and displayed by the display means and the main display means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position. a first fused display mode in which the sub display means and the main display means are fused and displayed; and the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right positions to the second position. Since it has a fused display mode setting means for switching and setting a second fused display mode in which the sub display means and the main display means are fused and displayed when the sub display means and the main display means are later moved to the left and right positions, This has the effect of being able to realize appropriate display performance depending on whether it is located on the right side or on the left or right side.

<Feature J group> (Display mode of inverted sub-liquid crystal with mirror)
A discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, a display means for displaying a production mode based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a case where the display means displays a production mode based on the specific discrimination result. In the gaming machine, the display means is comprised of at least a first display means and a second display means, and the display means includes a first display means and a second display means. a rotation means capable of rotating the second display means to a front position where the display area faces the front side and a second position where the display area faces the back side, respectively; When the first projection means for projecting the presentation mode displayed on the first display means to the front side and the second display means are rotated to the rear position, the presentation mode displayed on the second display means is displayed on the second display means. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that it has a second projection means for projecting the performance mode onto the front side.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a projection device such as a mirror. In such conventional gaming machines, when a predetermined entertainment performance is selected, the projection device is made visible and the player's face is projected onto the projection device, thereby making it possible to realize an impactful entertainment performance. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-329159).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the projection device is simply set in a state where it is visible to the player, so the objects that can be projected onto the projection device are limited. Therefore, there have been cases where it has not been possible to sufficiently improve the player's interest using the projection device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, there is a discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, a display means that displays a performance mode based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a display means that is specific to the display means. and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player when a performance mode based on the determination result of is displayed, and the displaying means includes a first displaying means and a second displaying means. and a rotating means that is capable of rotating the first display means and the second display means respectively to a front position where the display area faces the front side and a second position where the display area faces the back side. a first projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side when the first display means is rotated to the rear position; and second projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the front side when the display device is rotated.

As a result, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the player can visually recognize the performance mode displayed on each. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel performance operation in which the first display means and the second display means can be rotated while the performance mode remains visible, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. effective.

In the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means have mirror surfaces capable of projecting the performance mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. A game machine J2 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means project the presentation mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the rear position, the performance mode displayed on each can be clearly seen by the player through the mirror surface. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine J2, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means to a position where each of the first display means and the second display means forms a V-shape toward the front side of the game machine as the rear position. Game machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, the rotating means has a V-shape in which the first display means and the second display means are respectively located on the front side of the gaming machine as the rear position. Since it is rotated to a different position, the rear position can make the appearance significantly different from the front position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means are arranged so that when the first display means and the second display means are respectively rotated to the rear position, A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it has a projection surface that can face the display area of the display means or the display area of the second display means.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means are such that the first display means and the second display means respectively Since it has a projection surface that can face the display area of the first display means or the display area of the second display means when rotated to the rear position, the display area of the first display means and the second display Since the performance mode displayed on the display area of the means can be directly projected, there is an effect that the first projection means and the second projection means can be made more compact.

is arranged in a position facing the first display area of the first display means rotated to the rear position in the gaming machine J1, and diffracts the performance mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means. A first diffraction means is arranged at a position facing the second display area of the second display means rotated to the rear position, and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the second projection means. A gaming machine J5, characterized in that it has a second diffraction means for causing

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are achieved. That is, first diffraction means is disposed at a position facing the display area of the first display means rotated to the rear position and diffracts the presentation mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means. and a second diffraction means, which is disposed at a position facing the second display area of the display means rotated to the rear position, and diffracts the presentation mode displayed on the second display means to the second projection means. and has.

Thereby, the arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be freely determined within the range in which diffraction can be performed by the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means, respectively. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be increased.

A gaming machine J6, wherein the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means in the gaming machine J5 are half mirrors.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J5, since the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are constituted by half mirrors, the display area of the first display means and the second diffraction means are It is possible to vary whether or not the effect mode displayed in the display area of the display means is diffracted. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in production can be increased.

In the game machine J5 or J6, when at least one of the first display means and the second display means is rotated to the rear position, the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are respectively rotated to the rear position. A gaming machine J7 characterized in that it has a display means or a movable means that is moved to a position facing the second display means.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J5 or J6, the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are respectively configured such that at least one of the first display means and the second display means is Since it has a movable means that moves to a position facing the first display means or the second display means when rotated to the back position, the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means is provided. This has the effect of making it possible to diffraction more accurately.

<Characteristics K group> (Over winning using closing command)
A main control means for controlling the game, a slave control means for controlling the game based on a control signal from the main control means, an open state in which a game ball can enter, and the entrance of the game ball is regulated. and a variable ball entry means that is variable in the regulation state, and the main control means includes a discriminating means for performing discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a performance for executing a performance based on the discriminating result by the discriminating means. Based on the fact that the discrimination result by the performance information determining means for determining the performance information and the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the variable ball entry means is varied from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, an establishment signal outputting means for outputting an establishment signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and an outputting ball entry signal based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. The slave control means includes a ball entry signal output means for outputting a ball entering signal, and a benefit giving means for giving advantageous benefits to the player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means. a performance mode determining means for determining a performance mode based on the performance information determined by the means; a performance execution means for executing the performance mode determined by the performance mode determining means; and after receiving the establishment signal, a predetermined A gaming machine K1 characterized in that it has a specific performance execution means that executes a specific performance when the ball landing signal is received during a period until a condition is satisfied.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines enter a winning state when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed based on a starting ball. In such a gaming machine, when a winning state occurs, a large opening provided on the board is set to an open state. Since a prize ball is awarded to the player by placing the game ball into the large open opening, it is advantageous for the player to achieve a winning state. In addition, when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize after being set to the open state, the large open mouth is set to the closed state in which it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter. In addition, some of these conventional gaming machines execute a special performance (over-win performance) when it is detected that more than a specified number of game balls have won with the large opening opening in one open state. There are some games that aim to improve the interest of players by doing so (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-112239).

In such conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to count the number of game balls that have entered the large opening hole in order to determine whether or not to execute the over winning effect. It was common for the number of balls to enter the mouth to be different until the mouth closed. Therefore, the conditions for whether or not to execute the over winning effect must be reset depending on the machine model, so it may not be possible to transfer the program adopted for one machine model to another gaming machine as is. Ta. That is, there was a problem in that the developer's workload increased.

On the other hand, the gaming machine K1 has a main control means for controlling the game, a slave control means for controlling the game based on a control signal from the main control means, and an opening that allows the game ball to enter. The main control means includes a variable ball entry means that is variable between the state and a regulation state in which the entry of game balls is regulated, and the main control means includes a discriminating means that performs discrimination based on establishment of a discriminating condition; performance information determining means for determining performance information for executing a performance based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means; and based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game that varies from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is met; an establishment signal output means that outputs an establishment signal based on establishment of the predetermined condition; and the variable entry means. an incoming ball signal output means for outputting an incoming ball signal based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball; and an advantageous benefit to the player based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable ball incoming means. and a benefit granting means for determining a performance mode, and the slave control means includes a performance mode determining means for determining a performance mode based on the performance information determined by the performance information determining means, and a performance mode determining means determined by the performance mode determining means. and a specific effect execution means that executes a specific effect when the ball landing signal is received within a period from when the establishment signal is received until a predetermined condition is satisfied. , has.

As a result, the slave control means can determine whether to execute a specific performance simply depending on whether or not it has received the establishment signal from the main control means, so the slave control means can directly determine whether or not the predetermined condition has been met. There is no need to judge. Therefore, it is possible to easily divert the control program set to the slave control means, which has the effect of reducing the developer's workload.

In the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means or when a predetermined period of time elapses. .

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means or when a predetermined period of time elapses. Therefore, after a predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable entry means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a variable entry ball will be sent to the player after a specific performance has been executed. It is possible to make the means recognize that the game ball has entered the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to please the players who have confirmed the specific performance.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the slave control means receives, as the predetermined condition, the establishment signal outputted by the establishment signal output means based on the elapse of a predetermined period, the slave control means executes the specific performance. A gaming machine K3 is characterized in that it includes an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the above.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the slave control means causes the establishment signal output means to output the signal based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time as the predetermined condition. Since the device is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the specific effect when the establishment signal is received, the execution of the specific effect causes the player to receive a number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number. It is possible to notify that the ball has entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific performance can be more pleased.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means and the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition. a storage means for storing the information at least until the determination condition is satisfied; a preliminary determination means for determining the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied; and a preliminary signal indicating preliminary information based on a preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means. a preliminary signal output means for outputting a signal to the slave control means, and the slave control means has a preliminary information storage means for storing the preliminary information indicated by the preliminary signal, and the specific effect mode is A gaming machine K4, characterized in that it indicates the content of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and causes the acquisition means to store the acquired information at least until the determination condition is satisfied. a storage means, a pre-discrimination means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination condition is satisfied, and an a priori signal indicating a priori information based on a pre-discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means; a preliminary signal output means for outputting to the control means, the slave control means having a preliminary information storage means for storing the preliminary information indicated by the preliminary signal, and the specific effect mode is It shows the contents of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

As a result, in order to confirm the contents of the advance information, the player is actively asked to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means after a predetermined condition is established, and the player is actively forced to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game. It can be launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention using the liquid crystal display device 523 as an example>
A game machine comprising: an electrical device; a board having a ground portion disposed opposite to one side of the electrical device and connected to earth; and a connecting means for electrically connecting the electrical device to the ground portion of the board. In the above, the connection means is sandwiched between opposing sides of one side of the electrical device and the ground portion of the board, and is configured to prevent the electrical device or the board from moving relative to each other when the electrical device or the board is relatively displaced in a direction perpendicular to the facing direction. A gaming machine L1 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to be sheared and deformed in accordance with displacement.

Here, the electric device includes an electric device, a board having a ground portion that is disposed opposite to one side of the electric device and is connected to earth, and a connecting means for electrically connecting the electric device to the ground portion of the board. Gaming machines are known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-236463). Specifically, the electrical device is formed as a liquid crystal display device in which a shield member made of a metal plate is provided on the back side of a liquid crystal panel. Further, the connecting means is formed as an arcuate leaf spring, and the base end is in contact with (electrically connected to) the ground portion of the board, and the convex surface of the arc is in contact with (electrically connected to) the shield member. Ru. The base end of the connecting means is fixed to the substrate, while the arcuate convex surface is pressed against the shield member, and the contact is maintained by elastic deformation of the leaf spring. Thereby, static electricity generated in the shield member can be released to the ground via the ground portion of the board. Therefore, for example, even if the shield member is charged with static electricity generated due to the rolling of game balls or the displacement of the liquid crystal display device, the electric charge is removed through the ground part of the board, and the problem such as color unevenness or missing dots on the liquid crystal display is eliminated. The occurrence of defects can be suppressed.

However, with the above-mentioned conventional technology, when the electric device is displaced, or when the electric device is vibrated due to the input of external force due to the displacement of other performance members or the rolling/collision of the game ball, the shield is damaged. When the member and the board are relatively displaced in a direction perpendicular to the opposing direction, the arcuate convex surface of the connecting means slides against the shielding member, causing wear of the connecting means or the object of contact of the connecting means. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the connecting means is sandwiched between the opposing sides of one side of the electrical device and the ground portion of the board, and the electrical device or the board is relatively displaced in a direction perpendicular to the facing direction. Since it is formed so that it can be sheared and deformed according to its relative displacement when . That is, by shearing and deforming the connecting means, it is possible to suppress one side or the other side of the connecting means from sliding with respect to the electric device or the board. As a result, it is possible to suppress wear of the connecting means or the object (electrical equipment or board) that the connecting means comes into contact with.

In addition, since the connecting means is sandwiched between one side of the electrical device and the ground portion of the board, when assembling, it is only necessary to sandwich the connecting means between the opposing sides of the electrical device and the board, and the work such as fastening can be done easily. can be made unnecessary. As a result, workability can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

In the game machine L1, the connection means includes an elastic member made of an elastic material, one side of which faces one side of the electric device, and the other side of which faces the ground portion of the board, and one side of the elastic member and A gaming machine L2 comprising: a conductive member made of a conductive material and covered with at least one other side of the electric device and abuts one side of the electric device and a ground portion of the board.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, an elastic member made of an elastic material is provided, one side of which faces one side of the electric device, and the other side of which faces the ground portion of the board, and an elastic member formed of an elastic material. A conductive member is provided on one side and the other side of the electric device, and is covered with at least one side of the electric device, and is in contact with one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the board, and is made of a conductive material, so that the electric device or the board is perpendicular to the facing direction. When the elastic member is relatively displaced in the direction of Can be maintained. That is, the shearing deformation of the elastic member can prevent the conductive member sandwiched between one side and the other side of the elastic member and the electrical device or the board from sliding. As a result, it is possible to suppress wear of the connecting means (conductive member) or the object (electrical device or board) that the connecting means comes into contact with.

In the gaming machine L2, the connecting means includes the conductive member formed in an endless band shape, the elastic member being fitted into the conductive member, and the outer peripheral surface of the conductive member being connected to one side of the electric device and the board. A gaming machine L3 is characterized in that it comes into contact with a ground portion of the gaming machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, the connecting means has a conductive member formed in the shape of an endless band, and an elastic member is fitted inside the conductive member, so that assembly of the connecting means is simplified. can be used to reduce component costs.

Further, since the outer circumferential surface of the conductive member is brought into contact with one side of the electrical device and the ground portion of the board, a contact area can be ensured. Therefore, when the electric device is charged, the charge can be easily removed via the ground portion of the board.

In the game machine L3, the conductive member is formed into an endless strip by connecting one end and the other end of the strip, and the connecting portion connecting the one end and the other end of the strip is connected to one side of the electric device or the board. A gaming machine L4 characterized in that the gaming machine L4 is disposed at a position not in contact with a ground portion of the gaming machine L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3, the conductive member is formed into an endless strip by connecting one end of the strip and the other end, and the connecting portion connecting the one end of the strip and the other end is Since it is installed in a position where it does not come into contact with one side of the electrical equipment or the ground part of the board, the connection part becomes a step and the contact with the one side of the electrical equipment or the ground part of the board does not come into contact. It is possible to prevent it from becoming stable. That is, a contact area can be ensured, and sliding of the conductive member against the electric device or the board can be suppressed to that extent, and electric charges can be easily removed.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the conductive member includes a first portion that comes into contact with one side of the electric device, a second portion that comes into contact with the ground portion of the board, and a second portion that comes into contact with the ground portion of the board. a pair of third parts that connect the parts, and the width of the third part is set to be smaller at least in part than the width of the first and second parts. A gaming machine L5.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine L3 or L4, the conductive member has a first part that comes into contact with one side of the electrical equipment, and a second part that comes into contact with the ground part of the board. , a pair of third parts connecting the first part and the second part, and the width of the third part is at least partially smaller than the width of the first part and the second part. Since the third portion is set, the conductive member can be easily deformed in the direction of the endless strip-shaped opening. Therefore, when the electric device or the board is relatively displaced in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which they face each other and in the direction of the endless strip-shaped opening of the conductive member, the first portion and the second portion of the conductive member Sliding with respect to one surface side and the ground portion of the board can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine L5, the gaming machine L6 is characterized in that the pair of third portions are arranged at different positions in the opening direction of the endless strip.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5, since the pair of third portions are arranged at different positions in the opening direction of the endless strip, the conductive member is not deformed in the opening direction of the endless strip. You can increase your sexuality.

A gaming machine L7, in any one of the gaming machines L2 to L6, wherein the conductive member is formed from a conductive cloth or a conductive nonwoven fabric.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines L2 to L6, since the conductive member is formed from a conductive cloth or a conductive nonwoven fabric, its flexibility can be ensured. Therefore, when the elastic member is sheared and deformed as the electric device or the board is relatively displaced in a direction perpendicular to the opposing direction, the conductive member can easily follow the sheared deformation of the elastic member. As a result, the conductive member can be prevented from sliding against one side of the electrical device and the ground portion of the board.

In addition, by forming the conductive member from conductive cloth or conductive nonwoven fabric, its flexibility can be ensured, so durability can be improved when the conductive member is repeatedly deformed due to relative displacement of the electrical equipment or board. can be achieved.

An example of a conductive cloth or a conductive nonwoven fabric is a cloth (sheet) made by intertwining threads of polyester fiber coated with one or both of copper and nickel on the outer surface with or without weaving. be done. Examples of weaving methods include plain weave and twill weave.

In the gaming machine L7, a gaming machine L8 is characterized in that one or more protrusions are provided protruding from one side of the electric device or the ground portion of the board.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L7, one or more protrusions are provided protruding from one side of the electrical device or the ground portion of the board, so that the conductive member is aligned with the shape of the protrusions. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress sliding of the conductive member with respect to one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the board.

In gaming machine L8, gaming machine L9 is characterized in that the protrusion is formed by solder soldered to the ground portion of the board.

According to the game machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine L8, since the protrusions are formed by soldering to the ground part of the board, the protrusions can be formed in the process of soldering electronic components to the board. I can do it. Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate process for forming the protrusions, and the process can be used in combination, so that the number of man-hours can be suppressed and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. In addition, by forming a protrusion with solder on the ground part, it is possible to secure a contact area between the conductive member and the ground part, so that when an electrical device is charged, the contact area can be secured through the ground part of the board. This makes it easier to remove the charge.

The gaming machine L9 is characterized in that the board is provided with a plurality of through holes and a plurality of protrusions, and the through holes and the protrusions are arranged in a staggered manner.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L9, the board is provided with a plurality of through holes and a plurality of protrusions protruding, and the through holes and the protrusions are arranged in a staggered manner. By using a plurality of protrusions, it is possible to suppress the conductive member from sliding against the substrate, and it is also possible to easily remove the electric charge that has been charged in electrical equipment. The heat generated during this process can be efficiently dissipated.

In the gaming machine L9, the other side of the elastic member includes a first region facing a region of the substrate where the protrusion is provided and a second region facing a region of the substrate where the protrusion is not formed. A gaming machine L11, characterized in that the second area is more protruded than the first area.

According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L9, the other side of the elastic member has a first area facing the area where the protrusion of the substrate is protruded, and a first area where the protrusion of the substrate is not formed. and a second region facing the first region, and the second region is protruded from the first region, so that when the connecting means is held between the electric device and the board and the elastic member is compressed, , the surface pressure in the second region can be increased. As a result, it becomes difficult for the conductive member held between the second region and the substrate to get over the protrusion, so that sliding of the conductive member with respect to the substrate can be suppressed accordingly. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the first region can be lowered, it is possible to suppress shear deformation of the elastic member from becoming more difficult.

Any one of the gaming machines L2 to L11 includes a plate-shaped intervening member interposed between one side of the electric device and the substrate and having an opening formed therein, A gaming machine L12 characterized in that the size of the opening is smaller than the size of the connecting means in a no-load state.

According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L2 to L11, a plate-shaped intervening member is interposed between one side of the electric device and the board and has an opening formed therein. Since the size of the opening of the interposed member is smaller than the size of the connecting means under no load, the connecting means can be held between the opening of the interposed member. Therefore, the assembly work can be performed while holding the connecting means on the intervening member, and the positioning of the connecting means can be performed as the intervening member is disposed, which reduces the workability of the assembly work. You can improve your performance.

In the game machine L12, the elastic member is formed of a compressible elastic member, and when the connection means is sandwiched between the electric device and the board, the inner edge of the opening of the intervening member and the connection A gaming machine L13 characterized in that a gap is formed between the device and the outer surface of the device.

Here, in a configuration in which the size of the opening of the intervening member is made smaller than the size of the connecting means in a no-load state and the connecting means is held between the opening of the intervening member, shear deformation of the elastic member is inhibited. Therefore, when the electrical device or the board is relatively displaced in a direction perpendicular to the facing direction, there is a possibility that the conductive member may slide with respect to the electrical device or the board.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L12, the elastic member is formed from a compressible elastic member, and when the connecting means is sandwiched between the electrical equipment and the board, the intermediary Since a gap is formed between the inner edge of the opening of the installation member and the outer surface of the connecting means, it is possible to prevent the connecting means (elastic member) from being restrained by the inner edge of the opening. That is, during assembly work, the connection means is held in the intervening member (opening) to improve the workability of the assembly work, while maintaining the assembled state (the state in which the connection means is sandwiched between the electrical equipment and the board). ), the elastic member can be easily sheared and deformed, and the conductive member can be prevented from sliding against the electrical device or the board.

The compressible elastic material is preferably a porous elastic body, such as a synthetic sponge formed by foaming from a synthetic resin such as polyurethane, or a foamed rubber (foamed rubber) made by kneading a foaming agent into a rubber raw material and vulcanizing it. ) etc. are exemplified. In this case, the shape of the cells may be closed cells or open cells.

A gaming machine L14 in the gaming machine L13, wherein the outer surface of the elastic member on the side held by the opening of the intervening member is recessed inward.

According to the game machine L14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L13, the outer surface of the elastic member on the side held by the opening of the intervening member is recessed inward, so that the connection between the electrical equipment and the board is reduced. When the connecting means is held between them, the outer surface of the elastic member is easily deformed in a direction away from the inner edge of the opening of the intervening member (inward of the elastic member) starting from the inwardly recessed portion. can. As a result, a gap can be reliably formed between the inner edge of the opening of the intervening member and the outer surface of the connecting means.

In the gaming machine L14, the connecting means is formed into an endless strip by connecting one end of the conductive member to the other end of the strip, and the elastic member is fitted into the conductive member, and connects one end of the conductive member to the other end of the strip. A gaming machine L15 characterized in that a connecting portion connected to the other end is disposed on an inwardly recessed outer surface of the elastic member.

According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L14, the connecting means is formed into an endless strip by connecting one end of the strip and the other end of the electrically conductive member, and an elastic member is provided inside the electrically conductive member. The connecting portion that is fitted and connects one end of the band shape to the other end is disposed on the outer surface side of the elastic member that is recessed inward, so that the connecting portion is formed by the inward recess. A connecting portion connecting one end and the other end of the strip can be accommodated in the space. Therefore, the connecting portion connecting one end and the other end of the band shape can be prevented from coming into contact with the inner edge of the opening of the intervening member. As a result, the deformability of the connecting means can be ensured.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15. In any one of the gaming machines M1, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15. In any one of the gaming machines M2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15. In any one of the gaming machines M3, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a displaceable member formed to be displaceable are known (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2014-014602).
When the displacement member is disposed on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (unknown at the time of filing this application), when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rotates with respect to the base. There was a problem that
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and provides a gaming machine that can suppress rotation of the base member with respect to the base when the displacement member is displaced. The purpose is to
<Means>
To achieve this objective, the game machine of Technical Idea 1 includes a base, a base member rotatably supported by the base, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member. and includes a suppressing means for suppressing rotation of the base member with respect to the base due to inertial force accompanying displacement of the displacement member.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the displacement member includes one side member, another side member arranged opposite to the one side member, and the one side member and the other side. A slide member whose one side and the other side are guided by the member and is slidably displaced is provided, and the slide member is guided by the one side guided member that is guided by the one side member and the other side member. the other side guided member; and a rotating member rotatably supported between the one side guided part and the other side guided part, the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member. differs from the relative displacement allowable state of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member, and the pair of slide members is configured such that the one side guided member and the other side guided member of one of the slide members are different from each other. , the one side guided member and the other side guided member of the other slide member are disposed in opposing positions, respectively.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in which the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is less than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. In the case where the slide member is slid in a substantially horizontal direction, the slide member assumes a posture in which the one side guided member is located substantially vertically above the other side guided member. The rotational position of the base member relative to the base is set so as to form the base member.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in Technical Idea 1, when the displacement member is displaced, it is possible to suppress the base member from rotating with respect to the base.
According to the game machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the game machine according to technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress rotation of the base member with respect to the base when the rotating member is rotated. .
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, rotation can be stabilized.
<Sign>
10 pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board
64 1st prize opening (means of entering the ball)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
300 back case (base)
400 base material
510 slide rail (one side member, other side member)
520, 2520, 3520, 4520 slide member
521, 4521 One side guided member
522, 4522 Other side guided member
523,4523 Liquid crystal display device (rotating member)
523c rotation axis
525 opposing member
531 drive motor (rotation drive means)
543 Liquid crystal device (electrical equipment)
544 interposed member
544a opening (opening)
545 board member (board)
545a1 protrusion
545a2 through hole (through hole)
545d ground section
546, 14556 , 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 conductive member (connection means)
546a elastic member
19546a1, 20546a1 recessed part (second area)
19546a2, 20546a2 non-concave cutout (first area)
546b, 17546a Cloth member (conductive member)
546b3 1st part
546b4 2nd part
546b5 3rd part
5600, 6600, 7600, 8600 passage member
5641, 6641, 7654, 8654 opening
5640, 6640 Overhanging wall part (passage member)
SL slide unit (displacement member)
8655 first switch (detection means)
8656 second switch (detection means)

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
543 Liquid crystal device (operating means)
543c Back part (conductive part)
544 Interposed member (regulating means)
545 Substrate member (substrate)
545a1 Protrusion (projection)
545d Ground part 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 Conductive member (connection means)
546a Elastic member 546b, 17546a Cloth member (conductive member)
546b3 1st part (one side)
546b4 Second part (other side)
546b5 Third part (part connecting one side and the other side)

Claims (1)

an operating means configured to be electrically operable; a substrate having a ground portion connected to earth and disposed at a distance from the operating means; and a conductive portion disposed on the operating means and configured to conduct electricity. and connecting means for electrically connecting the board to the ground portion of the board,
The connection means includes a conductor configured to be electrically conductive and whose one side and the other side can be connected to the conductive portion of the operating means and the ground portion of the substrate, and a portion connecting the one side and the other side of the conductor . an elastic member disposed along the conductive portion of the operating means and an elastic member disposed so as to be elastically deformable with one side and the other side of the conductor connected to a ground portion of the operating means or the substrate; is configured to be deformable according to the relative displacement when is relatively displaced,
The ground portion of the board includes a protrusion configured to protrude,
The other side of the conductor includes a first region that is contacted by the protrusion, and a second region that is located further away from the substrate than the first region and is not contacted by the protrusion ,
The gaming machine includes a regulating means that surrounds at least a portion of a portion connecting one side and the other side of the electrical conductor and is capable of regulating movement of the electrical conductor beyond a predetermined range;
A gaming machine characterized in that the elastic member is not formed at least in a portion of the conductor corresponding to the first region .

Images